JP7311159B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a pachinko gaming machine, the number of game balls that a player can use in a game (the number of balls held) was sometimes managed electronically (see Patent Document 1).

JP 2013-192613 A

However, if an abnormality occurs in the control device that electronically manages the number of balls held, and the actual number of balls held becomes unknown, the player will suffer a loss.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances. To provide a game machine capable of recognizing the number of balls.

The game machine according to the present invention is
specific control means for controlling a specific number, which is the number of game media that a player can use in a game;
a display means;
The specific control means includes a specific storage unit that stores first number data representing the specific number,
The display means includes a non-specific storage unit that stores second number data representing the specific number,
The specific control means transmits first specific data including the specific number represented by the first number data to the display means when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
When receiving the first specific data, the display means updates the second number data stored in the non-specific storage unit based on the first specific data, and stores the second number data in the non-specific storage unit. A gaming machine capable of displaying the specific number indicated by the second number data,
The display means may transmit second specific data including the specific number represented by the second number data to the specific control means when it is determined that the specific storage unit is abnormal,
When it is determined that the specific storage unit is abnormal, the specific control means determines that the specific number represented by the second specific data transmitted from the display means satisfies a specific condition. While the first number data is newly generated based on the specific data and stored in the specific storage unit, if the specific number does not satisfy the specific condition, the first number data is based on the second specific data. causing the display means to execute specific notification according to the abnormality without newly generating data and storing it in the specific storage unit;
The specific condition is that the specific number indicated by the second specific data is greater than zero.

According to the present invention, it is possible to recognize the number of held balls when an abnormality occurs in the control device that electronically manages the number of held balls.

1 is a perspective view of a pachinko game machine according to a basic embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a front view of a game board unit. (A) is a front view for explaining the standby state of the board movable body, (B) is a front view for explaining the moving state of the board movable body, and (C) is a front view for explaining the rotating state of the board movable body. It is a front view of display devices. It is a rear view of the pachinko game machine according to the basic embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the game control board side. It is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the effect control board side. (A) is a table showing normal figure-related determination information, and (B) is a table showing special figure-related determination information. (A) is a configuration example of a hit determination table, (B) is a configuration example of a normal pattern variation pattern determination table, and (C) is a configuration example of an auxiliary game control table. (A) is a configuration example of a jackpot determination table, (B) is a configuration example of a jackpot symbol type determination table, and (C) is a configuration example of a ready-to-win determination table. It is a configuration example of a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table. It is a configuration example of a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table. It is an example of a structure of the 1st look-ahead determination table. It is a structural example of a 2nd look-ahead determination table. (A) is a configuration example of a jackpot game control table, and (B) is a configuration example of a game state setting table. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a demonstration video, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a setting screen. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a first normal background image, (B) is a diagram showing an example of a second normal background image, and (C) is a diagram showing an example of a third normal background image. It is a figure, (D) is a figure which shows an example of the background image for probability variation, (E) is a figure which shows an example of the background image for time saving. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot opening production, (B) is a diagram showing an example of a round production, and (C) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot ending production. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a production design, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a production design display area. It is a diagram showing an example of a special figure variation effect of no reach loss. It is a diagram showing an example from the start of the special figure fluctuation production until reaching reach. It is a figure showing an example of N reach. It is a figure showing an example of L reach. FIG. 24 is a continuation of FIG. 23, showing an example of L reach. It is a figure showing an example of SP reach. FIG. 26 is a continuation of FIG. 25 showing an example of SP reach. FIG. 26 is a continuation of FIG. 26, showing an example of SP reach. It is a figure showing an example of movable body production|presentation. It is a figure showing an example of operation production. It is a figure showing an example of a pending|holding production|presentation. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a pending icon change notice; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a pending icon change notice; It is a flowchart of game control main processing. It is a flowchart of game control side timer interrupt processing. 6 is a flowchart of sensor detection processing; FIG. 36 is a flowchart of sensor detection processing, and is a diagram representing a continuation of FIG. 35 ; 4 is a flowchart of normal operation processing; 4 is a flowchart of special action processing; It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 variation pattern determination processing. It is a flow chart of special design variation processing. It is a flowchart of special design decision processing. It is a flow chart of production control main processing. 10 is a flowchart of 1 ms timer interrupt processing; 10 is a flowchart of 10 ms timer interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing; FIG. 47 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing, and is a diagram continuing from FIG. 46 ; BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS It is the front view which represented typically the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the game control board side and the frame control board side according to the first embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of frame control main processing according to the first embodiment; 10 is a flowchart showing an example of power-on processing in frame control main processing. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of frame control side timer interrupt processing according to the first embodiment; It is a flow chart showing an example of the number-of-balls restoration process. It is a flow chart showing an example of discharge control processing. It is a time chart showing an example of game ball shooting control when the shooting handle continues to be operated. It is a flow chart showing an example of possession ball number management processing. 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of fraud detection processing according to the first embodiment; It is a flow chart showing an example of firing prohibition processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of game ball entry prevention processing. (A) is a diagram showing a front view of the game board according to the first embodiment, and (B) is a diagram showing a sectional view along AA of FIG. 60 (A) when the entry prevention device is in a standby state. 60(C) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 60(A) when the entry prevention device is in an activated state. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the production control board side according to the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing in a 1st embodiment. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of operation confirmation processing; It is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the game control board side and the frame control board side according to the second embodiment. 10 is a flow chart showing an example of frame control side timer interrupt processing according to the second embodiment. It is a flow chart showing an example of fraud detection processing concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart showing an example of difference ball number management processing.

<Basic embodiment>
First, a basic embodiment of the present invention, which is the premise of the characterizing portion of the gaming machine of the present invention, will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. In each figure referred to, the same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and redundant descriptions of the same parts are omitted in principle. In the following, for the sake of simplification of description, by describing symbols or codes that refer to information, signals, physical quantities or members, etc., the names of the information, signals, physical quantities or members, etc. corresponding to the symbols or codes will be omitted or abbreviated. Sometimes.

1. Mechanical Configuration of Gaming Machine The pachinko gaming machine PY, which is a basic embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention, will be described. First, the mechanical configuration of the pachinko game machine PY will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 4. FIG. In the following description, the left, right, up and down directions of each part of the pachinko gaming machine PY refer to the left, right, up and down directions (as viewed from the front) for the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY. In addition, "forward" is the direction from the pachinko gaming machine PY to the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY, and "backward" is the direction from the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY to the pachinko gaming machine PY. ,explain.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko game machine PY includes a game board unit YU including a game board 1 and a game machine frame 2 housing the game board unit YU. The game machine frame 2 includes a frame-shaped outer frame 21 fixed to the game parlor, an inner frame 22 attached to the outer frame 21 and to which the game board unit YU is attached, and a front frame 22 rotatably supported by the inner frame 22. a door 23;

The outer frame 21, the inner frame 22, and the front door 23 have substantially the same outer peripheral shape when viewed from the front. An inner frame 22 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 21 .

The front door 23 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 22 . The front door 23 includes a frame-like front frame 23m in which a substantially vertically long rectangular large opening is formed approximately in the center, and a transparent plate 23t fitted in the opening. When the front door 23 is closed, the game board 1 included in the game board unit YU faces the transparent plate 23t. The transparent plate 23t is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate in a substantially vertically long rectangular shape. Therefore, when the pachinko game machine PY is installed in the game parlor, a player in front of the pachinko game machine PY can visually recognize the game area 6 formed on the front surface of the game board 1 through the transparent plate 23t. can. As the transparent plate 23t, a transparent glass plate may be used instead of the transparent synthetic resin plate. It is sufficient that the game area 6 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko game machine PY through the transparent plate 23t.

A shooting handle 72k that can be rotated for shooting game balls is provided on the lower right portion of the front surface of the front frame 23m. The amount (rotational angle) by which the shooting handle 72k is operated is associated with the magnitude of the force (shooting strength) applied to the game ball for shooting the game ball. Therefore, the game ball is shot with a shooting intensity corresponding to the rotation operation of the shooting handle 72k.

An upper plate 34 protruding forward greatly and a lower plate 35 arranged directly below the upper plate 34 are provided at the lower portion of the front surface of the front frame 23m. A first effect button 40k that can be pressed downward is provided in the center of the front side of the upper plate 34. - 特許庁An operating portion of the first effect button 40k protruding from the upper surface of the upper plate 34 is formed in a hemispherical shape. Further, on the rear side of the upper surface of the upper plate 34, a supply ball storage hole 34A for storing game balls supplied to the shooting handle 72k is formed. Further, the upper surface of the lower plate 35 is provided with a surplus ball storage hole 35A for storing surplus game balls that cannot be stored in the supplied ball storage hole 34A.

Further, an upper decorative body 31, a right decorative body 32, and a left decorative body 33 projecting forward are provided on the upper side, the right side, and the left side of the front transparent plate 23t of the front frame 23m. On the bottom surface of the upper decorative body 31, a pair of two speakers 52 capable of outputting sound, specifically, a speaker 52L arranged on the left side and a speaker 52R arranged on the right side, face downward and extend in a predetermined horizontal direction. They are placed side by side at a distance. In addition, a second effect button 41k that can be pressed downward is provided at the lower portion of the right decorative body 32. As shown in FIG. The operating portion of the second production button 41k is shaped like a bar. Furthermore, frame lamps 53 capable of emitting light are provided from the right decorative body 32 to the front right portion of the upper plate 34 and from the left decorative body 33 to the front left portion of the upper plate 34 .

It should be noted that the positions and numbers of the members and devices provided in the game machine frame 2 can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Next, the game board unit YU will be explained using FIG. 2 in addition to FIG. The game board unit YU has a game board 1 and a board performance unit EU attached to the back surface of the game board 1. - 特許庁First, the game board 1 will be explained. The game board 1 is made of a transparent synthetic resin plate. A generally circular opening 1A is formed in the approximate center of the game board 1 when viewed from the front.

A substantially ring-shaped center decoration 61 is formed on the front surface of the game board 1 so as to protrude forward along the opening 1A. Further, outside the center decoration 61, an outer rail 62 formed in a substantially ring shape so as to largely surround the center decoration 61 and an outer rail 62 between the left portion of the outer rail 62 and the center decoration 61 are provided. 62 and a curved inner rail 63 substantially parallel to the center decorative body 61 are formed.

A game area 6 is formed on the front surface of the game board 1 by a center decoration 61, an outer rail 62, an inner rail 63, and the like. That is, the front surface of the game board 1 is divided into the game area 6 and other areas by the center decoration 61, the outer rail 62 and the inner rail 63. As shown in FIG. A region surrounded by the outer rail 62 and the inner rail 63 forms a launching region 7 through which the launched game ball can travel toward the playing region 6 .

The game area 6 is an area where a game ball shot by operating the shooting handle 72k can flow down, and is provided for playing a game in the pachinko game machine PY. The game area 6 is provided with a large number of game nails (not shown). The game nail is suitable for the game ball entering the game area 6 and flowing down the game area 6 to the general winning opening 10, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, the gate 13, the big winning opening 14, etc. It constitutes a route that guides to

A general winning device 10</b>D is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 6 . The general prize winning device 10D is formed with a general prize winning port 10 that allows game balls to enter. When game balls enter the general winning hole 10, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, the game ball entering the general winning hole 10 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

In addition, a first starting winning device 11D is provided directly below the center of the center decorative body 61 in the game area 6. As shown in FIG. The first start winning device 11D is formed so that a game ball can enter the first start opening 11. - 特許庁The first starting prize winning device 11D has a non-operating structure that does not operate. Therefore, the first starting port 11 is constant (unchangeable) without changing the ease with which a game ball can enter. When the game balls enter the first starting port 11, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, the game ball entering the first starting hole 11 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

A warp portion 61w is formed from the left side of the center decorative body 61 to the lower end thereof, through which a game ball is passed. An entrance to the warp portion 61w is formed on the left side of the center decoration 61. As shown in FIG. The game ball entering the warp portion 61w passes through the inside of the warp portion 61w and exits from the exit. A stage 61s on which a game ball can roll is provided near the exit of the warp portion 61w and on the upper surface of the lower end portion of the center decorative body 61. As shown in FIG. At the tip of the stage 61s, a downward guiding portion 61y for guiding the game ball downward is provided. A first starting port 11 is provided directly below the downward guiding portion 61y.

Immediately below the first starting port 11 in the game area 6, a second starting winning device (so-called "electric chew") 12D is provided. The electric chew 12D is formed with a second starting port 12 that can be changed between a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter and an open state in which a game ball can enter. The second starting port 12 takes a closed state and an open state by an electric-tube opening/closing member 12k provided in the electric-tube 12D. That is, the second starting port 12 is opened and closed by the operation of the electric tube opening/closing member 12k.

The electric tube opening/closing member 12k is formed of a substantially L-shaped member when viewed from the front, and normally closes the second starting port 12. As shown in FIG. The electric chew opening/closing member 12k can protrude forward from a retracted state in which the front end surface is flush with the game area 6.例文帳に追加When the electric chew opening/closing member 12k protrudes forward, the electric chew opening/closing member 12k protrudes vertically to the game area 6, and the second start opening 12 is opened so that a ball can be entered. Specifically, the vertical portion erected at the left end of the horizontal portion of the electric chew opening/closing member 12k receives the game ball and guides it to the second starting port 12 from the horizontal portion.

In this way, the game ball can enter the second starting port 12 only when the electronic chew opening/closing member 12k is in the open state. When the game balls enter the second starting port 12, a predetermined number (for example, two) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, the game ball entering the second starting port 12 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

A gate 13 is provided on the right side of the center decorative body 61 . The gate 13 is configured to allow passage of game balls. Even if the game balls pass through the gate 13, the prize balls are not paid out. In addition, the game ball that has passed through the gate 13 flows down the game area 6 as it is.

A big winning device 14D is provided on the right side of the first starting winning device 11D in the game area 6 and downstream of the gate 13 . The big winning device 14D is formed with a big winning opening 14 that can be changed between a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter and an open state in which a game ball can enter. The big prize opening 14 takes a closed state and an open state by an AT opening/closing member 14k provided in the big prize winning device 14D. That is, the big winning opening 14 is opened and closed by the operation of the AT opening/closing member 14k.

The AT opening/closing member 14k is a movable member made of a flat plate having a substantially oblong rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and normally closes the big winning opening 14. As shown in FIG. A horizontal rotating shaft is provided at the lower end of the AT opening/closing member 14k. The AT opening/closing member 14k can be rotated approximately 90 degrees around its rotation axis so that the upper end of the AT opening/closing member 14k falls forward. When the AT opening/closing member 14k rotates, the AT opening/closing member 14k protrudes perpendicularly to the game area 6, and the big winning opening 14 is opened so that a ball can be entered.

In this way, the game ball can enter the big winning hole 14 only when the AT opening/closing member 14k is in the open state. When game balls enter the big winning hole 14, a predetermined number (one in the basic embodiment) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, the game ball entering the big winning hole 14 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

In addition, below the big winning device 14D in the game area 6, the upper surface thereof is formed obliquely downward to the left, and a guide path 64 for guiding the game ball to the second start port 12 is formed in the game area 6 (the front surface of the game board 1). It is provided so as to protrude forward from the A game ball rolling on the upper surface of the guide path 64 can flow down toward the second starting port 12 , but basically cannot enter the first starting port 11 .

In addition, the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 11, the second start hole 12, the big winning hole 14, and the general winning hole 10, and the passage of the game ball through the gate 13 are collectively referred to as the first starting hole 11, The second starting gate 12, the big prize gate 14, the general prize gate 10, and the "winning" to the gate 13 are collectively called.

By the way, the game area 6 in which game balls can flow can be divided into a left game area 6A on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction and a right game area 6B on the right side. The operation mode of the shooting handle 72k that shoots the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 6A is called "left hitting". On the other hand, the operation mode of the shooting handle 72k that shoots the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 6B is called "right hitting".

In the game area 6, the flow path through which the game ball can flow down when the game ball is shot left-handed is called a first flow path R1, and the game ball can flow down when the game ball is shot right-handed. Such a flow path is referred to as a second flow path R2. The first flow path R1 and the second flow path R2 are also configured by a large number of game nails (not shown).

A first starting port 11 and two general winning ports 10 are provided on the first flow path R1. Therefore, the player can aim to win the first starting hole 11 or the general winning hole 10 by shooting the game ball so as to flow down the first flow path R1 by hitting to the left. On the other hand, a second starting port 12, a gate 13, and a big winning port 14 are provided on the second flow path R2. Therefore, the player can aim to enter the gate 13, the second starting hole 12, or the big winning hole 14 by shooting the game ball so as to flow down the second flow path R2 by hitting to the right.

In addition, at substantially the bottom of the game area 6, there are provided two out holes 19 for discharging game balls that have been hit into the game area 6 but have not won in any of the winning holes to the outside of the game area 6. there is Also, the number of winning balls to be awarded to each winning hole can be appropriately set.

Next, the board effect unit EU attached to the back surface of the game board 1 will be described. The board effect unit EU is a unitization of a plurality of devices that mainly perform effects. An image display device 50 and a board moving device 55 are attached to the board effect unit EU.

The image display device 50 is composed of a 20-inch 3D liquid crystal display, and has a display section 50a capable of displaying a 3D image. The image display device 50 is arranged several centimeters behind the game board 1 .

The board movable device 55 includes an operable board movable body 55k. The board movable body 55k has a laterally long plate-shaped elevating member 55k2 maintained in a horizontal state, and a substantially elliptical rotating member 55k1 provided in the center of the elevating member 55k2 in the left-right direction. The board movable body 55 k is arranged between the game board 1 and the image display device 50 . The movable board body 55k is arranged at the initial position, and in the standby state, the lower end portion of the movable board body 55k, specifically the lower end portion of the rotating member 55k1, is slightly downward from the upper end of the opening 1A of the game board 1. positioned. That is, the board movable body 55k is arranged so that only a portion of the lower end portion of the rotating member 55k1 is visible to the player in the standby state, and the majority thereof is invisible (see FIG. 3A).

Then, the board movable body 55k can be lowered as a whole from the initial position to a predetermined operating position, and can be raised from the operating position to return to the initial position (see FIG. 3(B)). The predetermined operating position is a position where the board movable body 55k is positioned substantially in the center of the opening 1A when viewed from the front. Here, the predetermined working position can be appropriately set, and whether the board movable body 55k is positioned above or below the approximate center of the opening 1A in a front view. good.

Further, the rotating member 55k1 can rotate clockwise and counterclockwise in a front view about a rotating shaft formed in the front-rear direction at its center (see FIG. 3(C)). The rotary motion of the rotating member 55k1 can be executed when the plate movable body 55k moves from the standby position to the operating position, when it is held at the operating position, and when it moves from the operating position to the standby position.

It should be noted that the positions and numbers of members and devices provided in the game board unit YU can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Next, the display devices 8 arranged to the right of the vertical center of the game area 6 formed on the front surface of the game board 1 (parts other than the game area 6) will be described. As shown in FIG. 4, the display device 8 includes a special symbol 1 indicator 81a that variably displays the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol 1"), a second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol 2 ) is variably displayed, and a normal pattern display 82 that variably displays a normal pattern (hereinafter referred to as "normal pattern") is included. In addition, the display device 8 includes a special figure 1 reservation indicator 83a that displays the special figure 1 reservation number described later, and a special figure 2 reservation indicator 83b that displays the special figure 2 reservation number described later. .

The variable display of the special figure 1 is executed when the special figure 1 lottery triggered by the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 11 is performed. Also, the variable display of the special figure 2 is executed when the special figure 2 lottery triggered by the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 12 is performed. The special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery will be described later. In the following description, the special figure 1 and special figure 2 are collectively referred to as "special figure", and the special figure 1 lottery and special figure 2 lottery are collectively referred to as "special figure lottery". Also, the special figure 1 indicator 81a and the special figure 2 indicator 81b are collectively referred to as "special figure indicator 81". Furthermore, the special figure 1 reservation indicator 83a and the special figure 2 reservation indicator 83b are collectively referred to as "special figure reservation indicator 83".

The variable display of the special figure notifies the result of the special figure lottery. In the variable display of the special figure, it is stopped and displayed after the special figure is variably displayed. The stop-displayed special figure (stopped special figure) is identification information representing the result of the special figure lottery derived as the display result of the variable display. When the stop-displayed special figure is a predetermined specific special figure, a big winning game with the opening of the big winning opening 14 is performed.

The special figure 1 indicator 81a and the special figure 2 indicator 81b are each composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side. The lighting mode of the special figure 1 indicator 81a and the special figure 2 indicator 81b represents the special figure according to the result of the special figure lottery, that is, the result of the special figure lottery. For example, if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, the final result will be "□□■■□□■■" (□: lights up, ■: lights out) to the 1st, 2nd, 5th, and 6th from the left. An LED lights up. This lighting mode is a jackpot pattern and represents a jackpot. Also, when the result of the special drawing lottery is a loss, only the rightmost LED is finally lit up like "■■■■■■■□". This lighting mode is a lost pattern and represents a failure. In addition, the lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the special drawing lottery is not limited, and can be set as appropriate. Therefore, for example, all the LEDs may be extinguished as a lost pattern.

In addition, in the variable display of the special figure, the variable display of the special figure is performed over a predetermined variation time before the special figure is stopped and displayed. The aspect of the variable display of the special figure is, for example, the aspect in which each LED is lit so that the light flows repeatedly from left to right. Note that the mode of the variable display is not particularly limited, and may be appropriately set such that all the LEDs blink all at once unless each LED is stopped (lighted up in a specific mode).

By the way, in the pachinko game machine PY, even if a game ball enters the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, the special figure lottery and the variable display of the special figure may not be performed immediately. Specifically, it is a case where the game ball enters the first starting hole 11 or the second starting hole 12 during the execution of the variable display of the special figure or during the execution of the jackpot game. In this case, the special figure lottery and the variable display of the special figure are suspended based on the winning prize. This suspended special figure lottery and variable display of the special figure are referred to as "special figure reservation".

For the special figure reservation, the special figure 1 lottery reserved based on the winning to the first start opening 11, and the "special figure 1 reservation" representing the variable display of the special figure 1, and the winning to the second start opening 12 There is a special figure 2 lottery reserved based on, and a "special figure 2 reservation" representing a variable display of the special figure 2. And, the special figure 1 reservation indicator 83a displays the number of special figure 1 reservations, that is, the number of reserved special figure 1 lottery and special figure 1 variable display. On the other hand, the special figure 2 reservation display 83b displays the number of special figure 2 reservations, that is, the number of reserved special figure 2 lotteries and the number of special figure 2 variable displays.

It is also possible to set or not set the upper limit to the number of special figure 1 reservations and the number of special figure 2 reservations. Also, when providing an upper limit to the number of special figure 1 reservation and the number of special figure 2 reservation, the number of special figure 1 reservation and the number of special figure 2 reservation may be the same or different. In addition, in the basic embodiment, it is assumed that the upper limit of the number of special figure 1 reservations and the number of special figure 2 reservations is set to "4".

Each of the special figure 1 pending indicator 83a and the special figure 2 pending indicator 83b is composed of four LEDs, and by lighting the LEDs by the number of special figure 1 pending and special figure 2 pending Display the number of FIG. 1 pending and special figure 2 pending. In the following, the number of special figure 1 reservations is called "special figure 1 reservation number (U1)", and the number of special figure 2 reservations is called "special figure 2 reservation number (U2)". In addition, "special figure 1 reservation number" and "special figure 2 reservation number" are collectively referred to as "special figure reservation number". Furthermore, "special figure 1 reservation indicator 83a" and "special figure 2 reservation indicator 83b" are collectively referred to as "special figure reservation indicator 83".

In addition, the variable display of the general pattern is executed when the general pattern lottery triggered by the winning of the game ball to the gate 13 is performed. Then, the variable display of the general pattern informs the result of the general pattern lottery. In the variable display of the normal map, after the normal map is displayed variably, the display is stopped. The stopped normal map (stop normal map) is identification information representing the result of the normal map lottery derived as the display result of the variable display. When the stop-displayed normal pattern is a predetermined specific normal pattern, an auxiliary game with opening of the second starting port 12 is performed.

The normal figure display 82 is composed of, for example, two LEDs. The lighting mode of the general pattern indicator 82 represents the general pattern corresponding to the result of the general pattern lottery, that is, the result of the general pattern lottery. When the result of the normal drawing lottery is a hit, both LEDs are finally lit like "□□" (□: lighting, ▪: lighting off). This lighting mode is a winning pattern and represents a winning. In addition, when the result of the normal drawing lottery is a loss, only the right LED lights up like "■□" in the end. This lighting mode is a lost pattern and represents a failure. In addition, the lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the normal drawing lottery is not limited, and can be set as appropriate. For example, a mode in which all the LEDs are extinguished may be employed as a lost pattern.

In addition, before the normal map is stop-displayed, the normal map is displayed with fluctuation for a predetermined fluctuation time. In the basic embodiment, the variable display mode of the normal map is a mode in which both LEDs are lit alternately. In addition, the aspect of the variable display of the normal figure is not particularly limited, and if each LED is not displayed as a stop display (lighting display in a specific aspect), all LEDs may be set as appropriate, such as blinking all at once. .

2. Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PY will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7. FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, on the back side of the pachinko game machine PY, there is a game control board 100 for performing control (progress of the game) related to a game in which a game profit can be obtained. Power is supplied to the performance control board 120 for controlling the performance, the image control board 140 for controlling the image, the payout control board 170 for controlling the payout of the game balls, and each board 100, 120, 140, 170. A power supply board 190 is attached.

A power switch 191 is connected to the power board 190 . By turning ON/OFF the power switch 191, the power is turned on/off.

As shown in FIG. 6, the game control board 100 is mounted with a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as "game control microcomputer") 101 for controlling the progress of the game of the pachinko game machine PY according to a program. Therefore, the game control board 100 can be positioned as a game control unit that controls the game. It should be noted that games that can obtain game profits to be controlled by the game control board 100 include special figure lottery, variable display of special figure, jackpot game, setting of game state to be described later, normal figure lottery, and variable display of general figure. , Auxiliary games, etc.

The game control microcomputer 101 includes a game ROM (Read Only Memory) 103 that stores programs, tables, etc. for controlling the progress of the game, a game RAM (Random Access Memory) 104 that is used as a work memory, and a game memory. A game CPU (Central Processing Unit) 102 for executing a program stored in a ROM 103 is included.

The game ROM 103 stores a program for performing game control main processing, game control side timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later. In addition, in the game ROM 103, a jackpot determination table, a jackpot symbol type determination table, a reach determination table, a special figure variation pattern determination table, a look-ahead determination table, a jackpot game control table, a game state setting table, a hit determination table, an auxiliary A game control table and the like are stored. Note that the game ROM 103 may be externally attached.

Further, the game RAM 104 is provided with a special figure reservation storage unit 105 . Here, the special figure reservation storage unit 105 will be described. As described above, when there is a prize to the first start port 11 or the second start port 12 of the game ball, a special figure reservation can occur, but if a special figure reservation is possible, that is, the number of special figure reservations When the upper limit has not been reached, based on this winning prize, judgment information consisting of various random numbers for performing a special lottery or the like is acquired. And this determination information is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 105 as special figure reservation. In the following, the determination information acquired by winning the first starting port 11 of the game ball is referred to as "special figure 1 related determination information", and is acquired by winning the second starting port 12 of the game ball. The determination information that is to be referred to as "special figure 2 related determination information". Also, the special figure 1 related determination information and the special figure 2 related determination information are collectively referred to as "special figure related determination information".

Then, the special figure 1 related determination information is stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a in the special figure reservation storage unit 105 as the special figure 1 reservation. On the other hand, the special figure 2 related determination information is stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b in the special figure reservation storage unit 105 as the special figure 2 reservation. The number of special figure 1 related determination information that can be stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a, that is, the upper limit value of the number of special figure 1 reservations is set to "4". Also, the number of special figure 2 related determination information that can be stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b, that is, the upper limit value of the number of special figure 2 reservations is set to "4".

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the game control board 100 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Therefore, signals output from various sensors are input to the game control board 100 . In addition, the game control board 100 outputs signals to various actuators.

Various sensors connected to the game control board 100 include a general winning opening sensor 10a, a first starting opening sensor 11a, a second starting opening sensor 12a, a gate sensor 13a, and a big winning opening sensor 14a. .

The general winning hole sensor 10 a detects a game ball that has entered the general winning hole 10 . The first starting hole sensor 11 a detects a game ball that has entered the first starting hole 11 . The second starting hole sensor 12 a detects a game ball that has entered the second starting hole 12 . The gate sensor 13 a detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 13 . The big winning hole sensor 14 a detects a game ball that has entered the big winning hole 14 .

In addition, various actuators connected to the game control board 100 include an electric chew solenoid 12s and an AT solenoid 14s. The electric chew solenoid 12s drives the electric chew opening/closing member 12k of the electric chew 12D. The AT solenoid 14s drives the AT opening/closing member 14k of the big winning device 14D.

It should be noted that the type and number of sensors connected to the game control board 100 can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game. Also, the type and number of actuators connected to the game control board 100 can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Furthermore, the game control board 100 is connected with the display devices 8 (a special figure display device 81, a normal figure display device 82, and a special figure reservation display device 83). Display control of these display devices 8 is performed by a game control microcomputer 101 .

The game control board 100 transmits various commands to the payout control board 170 and receives signals from the payout control board 170 for payout monitoring. The card unit CU and the payout device 73 are connected to the payout control board 170, and the ejection device 72 is also connected. The card unit CU is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine PY, and is a device that enables ball lending based on information such as the inserted prepaid card.

The payout control board 170 drives the payout motor 73m of the payout device 73 based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 101 and the signal from the connected card unit CU to pay out prize balls and rental balls. The paid-out prize balls and rental balls are detected by a pay-out sensor 73a for counting them.

A shooting device 72 is a device for shooting game balls. A shooting handle 72k is included in the shooting device 72 and constitutes an operating section or an input section that receives an operation for causing the shooting device 72 to shoot a game ball. The shooting handle 72k is provided with a touch switch 72a capable of detecting contact with the shooting handle 72k by a person such as a player. When the player operates the shooting handle 72k, the touch switch 72a detects the player's contact with the shooting handle 72k and outputs a detection signal to the payout control board 170 via the shooting control circuit 175.

Further, the firing handle 72k is connected to a firing volume knob 72b capable of detecting the rotation angle (operation amount) of the firing handle 72k. The shooting device 72 drives the shooting motor 72m so that the game ball is shot with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the shooting handle 72k detected by the shooting volume knob 72b. In addition, in the pachinko game machine PY, one game ball is shot about every 0.6 seconds while the rotation operation to the shooting handle 72k is maintained.

In addition, the game control board 100 transmits various commands including information on the game to the effect control board 120 according to the progress of the game. Based on various commands sent from the game control board 100 , the effect control board 120 can grasp the progress of the game (game control content) by the game control board 100 .

In addition, the connection between the game control board 100 and the effect control board 120 is a unidirectional communication connection in which only transmission of signals from the game control board 100 to the effect control board 120 is possible. That is, between the game control board 100 and the effect control board 120, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) is interposed as communication direction control means (not shown).

As shown in FIG. 7, the effect control board 120 is mounted with a one-chip microcomputer for effect control (hereinafter "effect control microcomputer") 121 for controlling the effect of the pachinko game machine PY according to a program. The performance control board 120 can be positioned as a performance control section that controls the performance together with the image control board 140, the audio control circuit 161, and the sub-drive board 162, which will be described later. However, the effect control unit includes at least the effect control board 120, and uses the effect device (image display device 50, speaker 52, frame lamp 53, and board movable body 55k, etc.) for game effects, customer waiting effects, and operation promotion. It is sufficient if the performance and the like can be controlled.

The effects to be controlled by the effect control board 120 include game effects (special figure fluctuation effects, pending effects, jackpot game effects, etc.), customer waiting effects, and operations of the first effect button 40k and the second effect button 41k. It includes an operation prompting presentation that prompts an operation during a valid period (operation valid period).

The performance control microcomputer 121 includes a performance ROM 123 that stores programs and the like for controlling performance with the progress of the game by the game control board 100, a performance RAM 124 that is used as a work memory, and a performance ROM 123. A performance CPU 122 for executing the program is included.

The effect ROM 123 stores programs for effect control main processing, reception interrupt processing, 1 ms timer interrupt processing, 10 ms timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later. Note that the performance ROM 123 may be externally attached.

The effect RAM 124 includes a starting winning command reserve storage unit 125 for storing a starting winning command to be described later, a symbol designation command storage unit 126 for storing a symbol designation command to be described later, and a special figure fluctuation start command to be described later. A variation start command storage unit 127 is provided.

An image control board 140 is connected to the performance control board 120 . The effect control microcomputer 121 of the effect control board 120 controls the display of the image display device 50 on the image control board 140 based on the command received from the game control board 100, that is, according to the progress of the game by the game control board 100. to do Incidentally, the connection between the effect control board 120 and the image control board 140 allows both transmission of signals from the effect control board 120 to the image control board 140 and transmission of signals from the image control board 140 to the effect control board 120. two-way communication connection.

The image control board 140 includes an image ROM 142 storing programs for image control, an image RAM 143 used as a work memory, and an image CPU 141 for executing the programs stored in the image ROM 142. . The image control board 140 also includes a CGROM (Character Generator Read Only Memory) 145 storing image data to be displayed on the image display device 50 and a VRAM (Video Random Access Memory) 146 and VDP (Video Display Processor) 144 . All or part of these electronic components may be configured in one chip.

The CGROM 145 stores, for example, image data (still image data and moving image data, specifically characters, items, patterns, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc.) for displaying images to be displayed on the image display device 50. (including patterns) and image data such as background images) are stored.

The VDP 144 reads the image data from the CGROM 145 and develops it in the development area in the VRAM 146 according to the display list created by the image CPU 141 based on the command from the effect control microcomputer 121 . Then, the developed image data are appropriately synthesized and an image is drawn in the frame buffer in the VRAM 146 . Then, the image drawn in the frame buffer is output to the image display device 50 as RGB signals. As a result, various effect images are displayed on the display section 50a.

Note that the display list is composed of a command group for instructing execution of drawing on a frame-by-frame basis. The display list contains information on various parameters such as the type of image to be drawn, the position to draw the image, the order of priority of display, the display magnification, and the transmittance of the image.

In addition, the effect control microcomputer 121 is based on the command received from the game control board 100, that is, in accordance with the progress of the game by the game control board 100, through the voice control circuit 161 from the speaker 52 voice, music, and Outputs sound effects, etc.

Sound data such as sound output from the speaker 52 is stored in the effect ROM 123 of the effect control board 120 . Note that the audio control circuit 161 may be configured by a substrate and a CPU may be mounted thereon. In this case, the CPU may be caused to execute voice control. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the board and the voice data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 52 may be connected to the image control board 140 to cause the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 to perform audio control. Furthermore, in this case, the audio data may be stored in the image ROM 142 of the image control board 140 .

Also, the performance control board 120 is connected to various sensors serving as input units and various actuators serving as drive sources via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Signals output from various sensors are input to the effect control board 120 . In addition, the effect control board 120 outputs signals to various actuators.

Various switches connected to the effect control board 120 include a first effect button sensor 40a and a second effect button sensor 41a. The first effect button sensor 40a detects that the first effect button 40k is pressed. The second effect button sensor 41a detects that the second effect button 41k is pressed. The 1st production|presentation button sensor 40a and the 2nd production|presentation button sensor 41a will output the signal according to the content of the detection to the production|presentation control board 120, if it detects that each was operated.

The type and number of switches connected to the effect control board 120 can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game. Also, the type and number of actuators connected to the effect control board 120 can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Various actuators connected to the effect control board 120 include a rotating member motor 55m1 and a lifting member motor 55m2. The rotating member motor 55m1 can drive the rotating member 55k1 to rotate the rotating member 55k1. The lifting member motor 55m2 can lift or lower the lifting member 55k2. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 121 creates operation pattern data that determines the operation mode of the rotating member 55k1 and the lifting member 55k2, and controls the operation of the rotating member 55k1 and the lifting member 55k2 via the sub-drive board 162. .

In addition, hereinafter, the operation of the "rotating member 55k1 and the lifting member 55k2" may be collectively referred to as "the operation of the board movable body 55k". Further, rotating the rotating member 55k1 and lowering or raising the lifting member 55k2 are also referred to as "rotating, lowering, or raising the board movable body 55k."

In addition, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs lighting control of the frame lamp 53 and the like via the sub-drive board 162 based on commands received from the game control board 100 and the like. Specifically, the production control microcomputer 121 creates light emission pattern data (data for deciding on/off and emission color, also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of the frame lamp 53, and controls the frame lamp 53 according to the light emission pattern data. Control light emission. In addition, the data stored in ROM123 for production|presentation of the production|presentation control board 120 is used for preparation of light emission pattern data.

It should be noted that the CPU may be mounted on the sub-drive board 162 formed of a board. In this case, the CPU may be caused to control the lighting of the frame lamp 53 and the like and control the operation of the board movable body 55k. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the substrate, and data relating to light emission patterns and operation patterns may be stored in the ROM.

3. Principal Games Performed by Gaming Machine Next, the principal games performed by the pachinko gaming machine PY will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 15. FIG.

3-1. Games Related to Universal Figures First, games related to universal charts will be described. The pachinko game machine PY can execute a normal pattern lottery when the shot game ball passes through the gate 13. - 特許庁When the general pattern lottery is performed, the general pattern display device 82 performs variable display of the general pattern (stop display after performing variable display). Here, the normal symbols to be stopped and displayed include winning symbols and losing symbols. In addition, the losing pattern of the normal map is also called "losing universal map" in order to distinguish it from the losing pattern of the special pattern, which will be described later.

When the winning symbols are stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is executed, and the game related to the passage of the gate 13 ends. On the other hand, when the losing normal figure is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is not performed, and the game related to passing through the gate 13 ends. Also, in the following, the passage of the game ball through the gate 13 when the variable display of the normal pattern or the auxiliary game is not performed is referred to as "establishment of the normal pattern fluctuation start condition".

The pachinko game machine PY performs a series of games such as the variable display of the normal pattern and the auxiliary game based on the establishment of the normal pattern fluctuation start condition, the acquisition of the general pattern related determination information and the general pattern lottery. can be done. As shown in FIG. 8A, normal pattern random numbers are included in the general pattern related determination information to be acquired. The normal symbol random number is a random number (determination information) for performing a hit determination. Each random number is appropriately bounded.

3-1-1. Hit Judgment Hit judgment is a judgment for determining whether or not there is a hit (whether or not an auxiliary game is executed) using a hit judgment table as shown in FIG. 9(A), for example. The hit determination table can be associated with a game state, which will be described later. When associated with the game state, the hit determination table includes a hit determination table used in the non-time-saving state (non-time-saving hit determination table) and a hit determination table used in the time-saving state (time-saving hit determination table).

In each hit determination table, the determination value of the normal symbol random number (normal symbol random number determination value) is appropriately distributed to the hit and loss that are the results of the hit determination. Therefore, the pachinko game machine PY collates the acquired normal symbol random numbers with the hit determination table, and performs hit determination as to whether it is a hit or a miss. If the result of the hit determination is hit, the hit pattern is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the normal pattern. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination is a loss, the lost normal figure is stopped and displayed in variable display of the normal figure. It should be noted that the winning probability can be changed as appropriate.

3-1-2. Normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination/normal pattern variable display Normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination is a determination for determining a normal pattern fluctuation pattern using a normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table such as shown in FIG. 9(B), for example. The normal pattern fluctuation pattern is identification information related to predetermined matters related to the variable display of the normal pattern, such as the normal pattern fluctuation time.

Normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table can be associated with the game state (non-time saving state/time saving state). When associated with the game state (non-time saving state / time saving state), the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table (non-time saving normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table) used in the non-time saving state and the time saving There is a normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table (shorter normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table) used when in the state.

In each normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table, one normal pattern fluctuation pattern, which is the result of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination, is stored for each normal pattern to be stopped. That is, the pachinko game machine PY can vary the normal figure fluctuation time between the non-time saving state and the time saving state. For example, in a non-time-saving state, for the variable display of the normal figure when stopping the normal figure (losing normal figure), the normal figure fluctuation time is 30 seconds. For the variable display of the normal pattern in the case of stop display, a normal pattern fluctuation pattern with a normal pattern fluctuation time of 30 seconds is determined. In addition, in the time-saving state, the variable display of the normal pattern when the losing normal pattern is stopped is determined to be a normal pattern with a normal pattern fluctuation time of 5 seconds, and the normal pattern when the winning pattern is stopped and displayed. For the variable display of , it is determined to be a normal pattern fluctuation pattern with a normal pattern fluctuation time of 5 seconds. In addition, it is possible to appropriately change these normal pattern fluctuation times.

Then, the variable display of the normal pattern fluctuation time associated with the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determined by the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination is performed by the normal pattern display device 82 . In this way, by performing the hit determination and the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination, the normal pattern display device 82 performs variable display of the normal pattern.

3-1-3. Auxiliary game Auxiliary game is a variable display of the general pattern, and as a display result (the result of the general pattern lottery), it is executed when the winning design is stopped and displayed (derived). In the auxiliary game, the electric chew 12D is opened

Elements constituting the auxiliary game (auxiliary game components) include various elements such as the number of times the electric chew 12D is opened and the opening time for each opening. The pachinko game machine PY controls an auxiliary game using an auxiliary game control table. Auxiliary game components are stored in the auxiliary game control table. For example, as shown in FIG. 9(C), it is possible to associate the game state (non-time saving state/time saving state) with the auxiliary game control table. That is, it is possible to associate the auxiliary game component with the game state (non-time saving state/time saving state). It should be noted that the specific contents of each element such as the number of times of opening and the opening time can be changed as appropriate.

The pachinko game machine PY can vary the opening time of the electric chew 12D between the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state and the auxiliary game in the time saving state. For example, in the auxiliary game in the non-time-saving state, the electric chew 12D is opened only for the first opening time during which it is difficult to win the game ball such as 0.2 seconds. On the other hand, in the auxiliary game in the time saving state, for example, it is longer than the first opening time, such as opening twice for 2.5 seconds with an interval (closed) of 1.0 seconds, and the game ball wins the electric chew 12D. The electric tube 12D is opened only for a second opening time that is easy to set.

In addition, below, the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state is also referred to as "short opening auxiliary game". On the other hand, the auxiliary game in the time saving state is also called "long opening auxiliary game". In addition, the opening time in each auxiliary game is the total time in that auxiliary game. It may be configured as follows.

3-2. Games Related to Special Figures Next, games related to special figures will be described. The pachinko game machine PY can execute the special figure 1 lottery when the launched game ball wins the first start hole 11.例文帳に追加When the special figure 1 lottery is performed, the special figure 1 variable display (stopped display after performing the variable display) is performed on the special figure 1 display device 81a to notify the result of the special figure 1 lottery. Here, the stop-displayed special figure 1 includes a big winning pattern and a losing pattern. That is, the results of the special figure 1 lottery include a big hit and a loss.

When the jackpot symbols are stop-displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new game state is set, and the game based on the winning is finished. Further, when the losing symbol is stopped and displayed, the game based on the winning is terminated without the big winning game being played.

Similarly, the pachinko gaming machine PY can execute the special figure 2 lottery when the launched game ball wins the second start hole 12.例文帳に追加When the special figure 2 lottery is performed, the special figure 2 variable display (stop display after performing the variable display) is performed in the special figure 2 display device 81b to notify the result of the special figure 2 lottery. Here, the stop-displayed special figure 2 includes a big hit pattern and a losing pattern. That is, the results of the special figure 2 lottery include a big hit and a loss.

When the jackpot symbols are stop-displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new game state is set, and the game based on the winning is finished. Furthermore, when the losing symbol is stopped and displayed, the big winning game is not performed, and the game based on the winning is finished.

Further, hereinafter, the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 11 is referred to as "establishment of the first starting condition", and the winning of the game ball in the second starting port 12 is referred to as "establishment of the second starting condition". It says. Also, "satisfaction of the first starting condition" and "satisfaction of the second starting condition" are collectively referred to as "satisfaction of the starting condition". In addition, the special design losing pattern is also called "loss special pattern" in order to distinguish it from the above-mentioned normal pattern losing pattern.

The pachinko game machine PY carries out a series of games such as variable display of special figures and jackpot games based on acquisition of special figure-related determination information and performing special figure lottery when starting conditions are established. And, in order to perform the variable display of the special figure, various determinations are made for the special figure related determination information. As shown in FIG. 8B, the special figure related determination information to be acquired includes a special symbol random number, a jackpot symbol type random number, a reach random number and a special figure variation pattern random number.

The special symbol random number is a random number (determination information) for judging the jackpot. The jackpot symbol type random number is a random number (determination information) for judging the jackpot symbol type. The reach random number is a random number (determination information) for performing reach determination. The special figure variation pattern random number is a random number (determination information) for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. Each random number is appropriately bounded. Next, each determination performed using the special figure-related determination information will be described.

3-2-1. Jackpot Judgment Jackpot judgment uses a jackpot judgment table to determine whether it is a jackpot (whether or not a jackpot game is executed), in other words, whether it is a jackpot or a loss. For example, as shown in FIG. 10A, the jackpot determination table can be provided in association with the later-described game state. Specifically, the jackpot determination table includes a jackpot determination table used in a normal probability state described later (hereinafter referred to as a "normal probability jackpot determination table") and a jackpot determination table used in a high probability state described later (hereinafter , "High Probability Jackpot Judgment Table").

In each jackpot determination table associated with the game state, the jackpot, which is the result of the jackpot determination, and the loss, the determination value of the special symbol random number (special symbol random number determination value) is distributed. The pachinko game machine PY collates the acquired special symbol random number with a jackpot determination table associated with the game state to determine whether it is a jackpot or a loss. As shown in FIG. 10(A), the high-probability jackpot determination table has more special symbol random number determination values that are determined to be a jackpot than the normal-probability jackpot determination table.

It should be noted that it is possible to appropriately change the method of distributing the special symbol random number determination value for the determination results of the jackpot probability and various jackpot determinations.

3-2-2. Jackpot pattern type determination Jackpot pattern type determination determines the type of jackpot pattern (jackpot pattern type) using a jackpot pattern type determination table as shown in FIG. It is to be. It is possible to associate the type of the jackpot symbol with the content of the jackpot, in other words, the components of the jackpot (contents advantageous to the player) composed of the game benefits given to the player.

In the jackpot symbol type determination table, the types of special symbols that are variably displayed (special figure 1/special figure 2), in other words, the winning caused by the jackpot symbol type determination (the jackpot symbol type determination is generated) is performed. It is associated with the type of starting port (first starting port 11/second starting port 12). That is, in the jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type determination table (first jackpot symbol type determination table) used when performing variable display of special figure 1 and the jackpot used when performing variable display of special figure 2 There is a symbol type determination table (second jackpot symbol type determination table).

A plurality of types of jackpot symbols can be set. In each jackpot symbol type determination table, a jackpot symbol type random number determination value (jackpot symbol type random number determination value) is assigned to the jackpot symbol type that is the result of the jackpot symbol type determination. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY collates the acquired jackpot design type random number with the jackpot design type determination table to determine the type of the jackpot design. In the first jackpot symbol type determination table and the second jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type random number determination value is appropriately distributed to various jackpot symbols.

The type of the special figure 1 jackpot pattern and the special figure 2 jackpot pattern can be set as appropriate, but for example, like the jackpot pattern type determination table shown in FIG. As a result, three types of jackpot patterns, jackpot pattern A, jackpot pattern B, and jackpot pattern C, are provided. can be provided. Then, like the jackpot symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 10B, in the first jackpot symbol type determination table and the second jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type random number determination value is appropriately distributed to various jackpot symbols. ing. In addition, it is possible to appropriately change the distribution rate of the jackpot symbol type. Also, the types of jackpot symbols can be increased or decreased as appropriate.

3-2-3. Reach determination Reach determination is, for example, when the result of the big hit determination is a loss, using a reach determination table as shown in FIG. to decide.

The reach determination table can be associated with the game state (non-time saving state/time saving state). When associated with the gaming state, for example, the reach determination table includes a reach determination table (non-time-saving reach determination table) used in the non-time-saving state, and a reach determination table (time-saving reach) used in the time-saving state. decision table).

In each reach determination table, the reach random number determination value (reach random number determination value) is divided into "with reach (generate reach)" and "no reach (not generate reach)", which is the result of reach determination. there is Therefore, the pachinko game machine PY collates the acquired reach random number with the reach determination table, and determines whether there is reach or not (whether or not reach is generated).

As shown in FIG. 10 (C), the number of reach random number determination values determined to be "with reach (generate reach)" can be different between the reach determination table for non-time saving and the reach determination table for time saving. It is possible. In the following, the result of the reach judgment performed on the premise that the result of the jackpot judgment is "losing" is called "with reach (generating reach)" is called "losing with reach", and "no reach ( It does not generate reach)” is sometimes called “no reach”. In addition, "losing without reach" is sometimes referred to as "losing", and "losing with reach" is sometimes referred to as "losing reach".

3-2-4. Special Figure Variation Pattern Judgment In the special figure fluctuation pattern judgment, regardless of whether the result of the jackpot judgment is a big hit or a loss, for example, a special symbol fluctuation pattern judgment table (special figure fluctuation pattern Judgment table) is used to determine the variation pattern (special figure variation pattern) of the variable display of the special figure.

The special figure fluctuation pattern is identification information for identifying predetermined matters related to the special figure fluctuation time, the so-called "scale", and the production flow (production content) of the special figure fluctuation production described later. It should be noted that the special figure fluctuation pattern, in addition to the special figure fluctuation time and the production flow of the special figure fluctuation production (production contents), it is also possible to include identification information regarding the result of the big hit determination and the result of the reach determination. In addition, it is possible to appropriately change the type and number of special figure variation patterns.

The special figure variation pattern determination table is the type of special symbol that performs variable display to be determined (special figure 1 / special figure 2), in other words, the starting opening where the winning caused by the special figure variation pattern determination was performed It is possible to associate with the type (first starting port 11/second starting port 12). That is, in the special figure variation pattern determination table, the special figure variation pattern determination table (special figure 1 variation pattern determination table: FIG. 11) used when performing variable display of special figure 1, and the variable display of special figure 2 There is a special figure variation pattern determination table (special figure 2 variation pattern determination table: FIG. 12) used when performing.

And each special figure fluctuation pattern determination table can be associated with the game state (non-time saving state/time saving state). Specifically, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table is used when the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table (special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for non-time saving) and the time saving state used in the non-time saving state There is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table (time saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table). On the other hand, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is also used when the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table (special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for non-time saving) used in the non-time saving state and the time saving state There is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table (time saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table).

In addition, each special figure variation pattern determination table associated with the gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state) can be further associated with the jackpot determination result and the reach determination result. That is, the non-time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table and the time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table each have a big hit, a loss with reach, and a loss without reach. Similarly, the non-time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table and the time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table each have a big hit, a loss with reach, and a loss without reach.

Furthermore, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for each reach no loss associated with the gaming state can also be associated with the special figure 1 pending number. For example, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for reach no loss used when the special figure 1 reservation number (U1) is 0 to 2, and the special figure 1 reservation number (U1) is used when it is 3 to 4 There is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for reachless loss. Similarly, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for each reach no loss associated with the gaming state can also be associated with the number of special figure 2 reservations. Specifically, when the special figure 2 reservation number (U2) is 0 to 2 and the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for reachless loss used when the special figure 2 reservation number (U2) is 3 to 4 There is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for reachless loss used for .

And, the variation display of the special figure of the special figure variation time corresponding to the special figure variation pattern determined by each special figure variation pattern determination is performed by the special figure display device 81 . After the variable display of the special figure, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the result of the variable special figure display (the result of the special symbol lottery), the variable display of the next special figure is not performed immediately, and the next special figure is continuously displayed. , a jackpot game is executed.

Also, each special figure variation pattern can be associated with the effect flow of the special figure variation performance as shown in the third column from the right of the table of FIGS. 11 and 12. Here, a typical production that constitutes the production flow of the special figure fluctuation production associated with the special figure fluctuation pattern will be described.

There are normal fluctuation, reach, normal reach (N reach), long reach (L reach), special reach (SP reach), and battle production as productions constituting the production flow of the special figure fluctuation production.

The normal fluctuation indicates that the stop-displayed performance symbols have started to fluctuate, and each one of the performance symbols is displayed variably at such a high speed that it is difficult to recognize, and the variable display of the special symbols has started. It is a performance to do. Then, the special figure fluctuation production related to the loss fluctuation without reach (the part from the start of the fluctuation of the production pattern to the stop of the fluctuation), and the part until the reach is established (confirmed) in the special figure fluctuation production where the reach occurs is normal fluctuation It may consist of

N reach, immediately after the reach is established (confirmed) through normal fluctuation, for example, the production pattern that constitutes the reach is temporarily stopped at that position for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). The production pattern slows down, and it is a production that fluctuates at a lower speed than normal fluctuation. The expectation of a big hit suggested by N reach is higher than normal variation and lower than L reach and SP reach, which will be described later. When the special figure fluctuation performance ends with N reach, the remaining one performance pattern that fluctuates at the low speed is stopped. In the case of losing, the remaining one production pattern is stopped with a production pattern different from the production pattern constituting the ready-to-win. When the special figure fluctuation performance is not completed with N reach, the remaining one performance pattern fluctuates again at high speed, and develops (switches) from N reach to L reach and SP reach while the reach is maintained.

The L reach can be executed both when a big win is made and when a loss is made, and is an effect suggesting whether or not a big win game state will be entered, suggesting that there is a possibility of a big win game state. Furthermore, the L reach is an effect that can be executed after the N reach, for example, and is performed for a longer time than the N reach, suggesting that the expectation of the big win is higher than the N reach. Even in the L reach, the established reach is maintained, but the production pattern that constitutes the reach is reduced, and a predetermined position that does not hinder the background image more than in the case of the N reach (for example, the left production pattern EZ1 described later). At the upper left of the display section 50a, in a state where the right effect symbol EZ3 is moved to the upper right of the display section 50a, the background image is switched to the L-reach dedicated background image (L-reach dedicated video is played). Note that in the L-reach mode, a 2DCG animation image is mainly displayed on the display unit 50a. As for the content of the L reach, an image of a scene different from the game related to the SP reach, which will be described later, is displayed, such as special training for the main character to acquire a special move.

The SP reach can be executed both at the time of a big hit and at the time of a loss, and is an effect suggesting whether or not a big win game state will occur, suggesting that there is a possibility of a big win game state. Furthermore, the SP reach is an effect that can be executed after the N reach, for example, and is performed for a longer time than the L reach, suggesting that the expectation of the big win is higher than the L reach. Even in the SP reach, the established reach is maintained, but the production pattern that constitutes the reach is reduced, and a predetermined position that does not hinder the background image more than in the case of the N reach (for example, the left production pattern EZ1 described later). At the upper left of the display section 50a, in a state where the right effect symbol EZ3 is moved to the upper right of the display section 50a, the background image is switched to the SP reach-only background image (the SP reach-only video is played). In SP reach, a 3DCG image is mainly displayed on the display section 50a. As the effect contents of the SP reach, an image of a scene in which the team to which the main character belongs and the team to which the main character's rival belongs is displayed.

A battle production|presentation is production|presentation which can be performed, for example after a reach in a time-saving state, and is production|presentation which suggests that a big-hit expectation degree is higher than normal fluctuation|variation. Even in the battle production, the established reach is maintained, but the production patterns that make up the reach are reduced and predetermined positions (upper right of)), it switches to a background image dedicated to battle production (a video dedicated to battle production flows). Also, in the battle effect, a 3DCG image is mainly displayed on the display section 50a.

In addition, in the N reach, L reach, SP reach, and the "state where the reach is maintained" in the battle production, the production patterns constituting the reach in the N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle production are displayed on the display unit 50a. In addition to the state in which it is visible in the display unit 50a, for example, it includes a state in which the effect pattern constituting the reach is difficult or invisible for a predetermined period of time in relation to the dedicated background image. Also, the contents of normal variation, N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle effects can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, the production that constitutes the special figure fluctuation production is not limited to these, and can be added or reduced as appropriate.

Further, as shown in the second column from the right in the table of FIGS. 11 to 12, the special figure variation pattern can be named by associating the big hit determination result and the effect contents of the special figure variation effect. . And, the special figure fluctuation pattern concerning the big hit may be collectively referred to as "big hit fluctuation", and the special figure fluctuation pattern concerning the loss as "losing fluctuation".

In addition, regardless of the jackpot determination result, the special figure variation pattern in which SP reach is performed is "SP reach variation", the special figure variation pattern in which L reach is performed is "L reach variation", and the special figure variation in N reach The special figure variation pattern that the production ends may be collectively referred to as "N reach variation". In addition, the loss variation with reach is sometimes referred to as “loss variation with reach”, and the loss variation without reach is collectively referred to as “normal loss variation”.

3-2-5. Look-ahead determination The pachinko gaming machine PY can perform look-ahead determination using a look-ahead determination table as shown in, for example, FIGS. be. The look-ahead determination table includes the type of starting opening related to the starting winning (first starting opening 11/second starting opening 12), in other words, the type of special figure displayed variably according to the starting winning (special figure 1/special figure 2). That is, in the look-ahead determination table, the first look-ahead determination table (FIG. 13) in the case where the variable display of the special figure 1 is performed by winning the first start opening 11, and the second start opening 12 winning the special figure There is a second look-ahead determination table (FIG. 14) for the case where 2 variable display is performed. The prefetching determination based on the first prefetching determination table is also referred to as "first prefetching determination", and the prefetching determination based on the second prefetching determination table is also referred to as "second prefetching determination".

The look-ahead determination table can also be associated with later-described game states (normal game state/high-probability high-base game state/low-probability high-base game state). That is, the lookahead determination table includes a lookahead determination table (normal game state lookahead determination table) used in the normal game state and a lookahead determination table used in the high probability high base game state (high probability high base game state look-ahead determination table) and a look-ahead determination table used in the low-probability high-base game state (low-probability high-base game state look-ahead determination table).

That is, the look-ahead determination table includes the first look-ahead determination table used in the normal game state, the first look-ahead determination table used in the high-probability high-base game state, and the first look-ahead determination table used in the low-probability high-base game state. The first look-ahead determination table used, the second look-ahead determination table used in the normal game state, the second look-ahead determination table used in the high-probability high-base game state, and the low-probability high-base game state and a second look-ahead determination table used for

In addition, by the prefetching determination using the prefetching determination table shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the special figure variation pattern related to the variable display of the special figure performed by the winning to the starting ports 11 and 12 is specified. That is, the special figure fluctuation pattern related to the variable display of the special figure is specified as the look-ahead determination result before the variable display of the special figure based on the winning prize is performed. In the process of specifying the special figure variation pattern, the propriety of the jackpot is also specified as a look-ahead determination result.

And, the look-ahead judgment result containing the information about the special figure fluctuation pattern etc. is associated with the start winning command. As will be described later, the start winning command is transmitted to the effect control board 120 as a result of the prefetch determination along with its generation. It should be noted that it is possible to appropriately change what kind of information is specified as the prefetch determination result. For example, information on the type of jackpot symbol can also be included in the look-ahead determination result.

As described above, the special figure is variably displayed on the special figure display device 81 by performing the jackpot determination, the jackpot symbol type determination, the reach determination, and the special figure variation pattern determination. Then, in the variable display of the special symbols, when the big winning symbols are stopped and displayed as the display result (the result of the special symbol lottery), the variable display of the next special symbols is not carried out, and the big winning game is executed continuously. Next, the jackpot game will be described.

3-3. Jackpot game The jackpot game includes multiple round games with opening and closing of the big winning port 14, the opening (also referred to as OP) from the start of the jackpot game to the start of the first round game, and the final round game. It includes an ending (also referred to as ED) from the end of the round game to the end of the jackpot game. Each round begins with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round and ends with the beginning of the next round or the beginning of the ending.

In addition, it is possible not to provide OP and ED. Also, hereinafter, the predetermined number of times (predetermined order) round game is simply referred to as "round". For example, the first round game is also called "1 round (1R)", and the tenth round game is called "10 rounds (10R)".

Then, the pachinko game machine PY controls the jackpot game using the jackpot game control table. The jackpot game control table can be set for each type of jackpot symbol. That is, it is possible to associate the jackpot game with the jackpot symbol type. One type or a plurality of types of jackpot games can be set.

The jackpot game control table stores elements (jackpot game components) that constitute the jackpot game. The jackpot game components include the number of round games, the number of openings of the big winning opening 14 in each round game, the type and opening time (opening pattern) of the big winning opening to be opened, and the time to close until the next opening. (closing time), opening time (opening time), and ending time (ending time).

Then, the pachinko gaming machine PY can control a jackpot game using a jackpot game control table as shown in FIG. 15(A), for example. That is, it is possible to set the types of jackpot games and jackpot game components for each jackpot game as shown in FIG. 15(A). Here, the jackpot game set in FIG. 15(A) will be described.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol A (hereinafter also referred to as "first jackpot game"), ten round games are played. Then, in each round game from 1R to 10R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the closed state of the big winning opening 14 is maintained for 10.0 seconds from the start of the first jackpot game to the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the big winning port 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the first jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol B (hereinafter also referred to as "second jackpot game"), five round games are played. Then, in each round game from 1R to 5R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the closed state of the big winning opening 14 is maintained for 10.0 seconds from the start of the second jackpot game to the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the big winning port 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the second jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol C (hereinafter also referred to as "third jackpot game"), five round games are performed. Then, in each round game from 1R to 5R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the closed state of the big winning opening 14 is maintained for 10.0 seconds from the start of the third jackpot game to the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the big winning port 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the third jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot pattern D (hereinafter also referred to as "fourth jackpot game"), ten round games are played. Then, in each round game from 1R to 10R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the closed state of the big winning opening 14 is maintained for 10.0 seconds from the start of the fourth jackpot game to the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the big winning port 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the fourth jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol E (hereinafter also referred to as "fifth jackpot game"), round games are performed six times. Then, in each round game from 1R to 6R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the closed state of the big winning opening 14 is maintained for 10.0 seconds from the start of the fifth jackpot game to the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the big winning port 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the fifth jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol F (hereinafter also referred to as "sixth jackpot game"), six round games are played. Then, in each round game from 1R to 6R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the closed state of the big winning port 14 is maintained for 10.0 seconds from the start of the sixth jackpot game to the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the big winning port 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the fifth jackpot game.

In addition, in each round game, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected by the big winning hole sensor 14a, even before the maximum opening time of the big winning hole 14 elapses, The winning opening 14 is closed and the round game ends. Also, the types and specific contents of the jackpot game components can be changed as appropriate.

Also, in the jackpot game control table shown in FIG. 15(A), which type of jackpot game is executed is determined by the type of jackpot symbol, but the jackpot game is executed in a different method. You can do so. For example, a device that can be distributed to two winning ports is provided in the game area 6, and when one winning port is won, only a jackpot game consisting of a predetermined number of round games is executed. Either a jackpot game consisting of round games larger than the number or a jackpot game consisting of round games smaller than a predetermined number may be executed with a predetermined probability by lottery or the like.

3-4. Game State Next, a game state that can be controlled by the pachinko game machine PY will be described. The pachinko game machine PY has a jackpot game state in which a jackpot game is executed and a non-jackpot game state in which a jackpot game is not executed. The non-jackpot game state includes a normal game state that is a basic base game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. Elements that are "advantageous to the player" related to the specific game state include the probability of a big win and the ease of opening the second starting port 12 . That is, the jackpot probability and the ease of opening the second start port 12 can be associated with the specific game state.

Advantageous to the player with regard to the probability of a big win means that the probability of a big win is higher than in the normal game state, and it becomes easier to win a big win. In addition, the easiness of opening the second starting port 12 is advantageous to the player when the easiness of opening the second starting port 12 is higher than in the normal game state, and the second starting port 12 is opened per unit time. It means it takes longer.

The specific game state includes a first specific game state in which both the jackpot probability and the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time are advantageous to the player, and a second specific game state in which only the jackpot probability is advantageous to the player. It is possible to set three types of a specific game state and a third specific game state in which only the open time per unit time of the second starting port 12 is advantageous to the player. It should be noted that it is also possible to mount some of the three types of specific game states without mounting all of these three types of specific game states on the pachinko gaming machine PY.

Here, as a partial game state focusing on the jackpot probability, a state in which the jackpot probability is higher than the normal game state and is advantageous to the player is called a "high-probability state". On the other hand, the state in which the jackpot probability is the normal probability in the normal game state and the jackpot probability is not advantageous to the player is called "normal probability state".

In addition, as a partial game state focusing on the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time, the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time is longer than the normal game state, A state in which the ease of opening is advantageous to the player is called a "time-saving state." On the other hand, the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time is the opening time in the normal game state, and the state in which the ease of opening the second starting port 12 is not advantageous to the player is called "non-time-saving". state.

Here, the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state will be described in detail. As described above, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time is longer than in the non-time saving state. That is, the time saving state is a state in which it is easier to win the second starting port 12 than the non-time saving state. Here, the specific method for making it easy to win the 2nd starting mouth 12 in a time saving state rather than a non-working time saving state is demonstrated.

For example, the time saving state can be made easier to win the second starting port 12 in the time saving state by making the normal figure fluctuation time easier to be shorter than in the non-time saving state. For example, as described above, regardless of the result of the hit determination, in the time saving state, the normal figure fluctuation time (5.0 seconds) shorter than the normal figure fluctuation time (30.0 seconds) determined in the non-time saving state let it be decided. As a result, the number of executions of the normal drawing lottery per unit time increases in the time saving state. In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state, if the probability of winning in the hit judgment and the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game are the same, the normal drawing lottery per unit time The greater the number of executions, the longer the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time.

In addition, by setting the time saving state to a state in which the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game is likely to be longer than in the non-time saving state, it is possible to make it easier to win the second start port 12 in the time saving state. . For example, as described above, in the non-time saving state, the electric chew 12D opens for 0.2 seconds in one auxiliary game, whereas in the time saving state, the electric chew 12D is 5.0 in total in one auxiliary game. Open for seconds. In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state, if the probability of winning in the hit judgment and the normal figure fluctuation time are the same, the number of times the auxiliary game is executed per unit time is equal, so once The longer the opening time of the electric chew 12D in the auxiliary game, the longer the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time.

Furthermore, by setting the time saving state to a state in which it is more likely to be determined as winning in the winning determination as compared with the non-time saving state, it is possible to make it easier to win the second starting port 12 in the time saving state. For example, as described above, in the non-time-saving state, it is determined to be a hit with a probability of 6600/65536 in the hit determination, whereas in the time-saving state, it is determined to be a hit with a probability of 59936/65536 in the hit determination. . In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state, if the opening time and normal figure fluctuation time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game are the same, the probability that it will be determined as a hit in the hit determination is high. , the number of hit determinations per unit time increases, so the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time increases.

Thus, in the time saving state, winning is easier than in the non-time saving state, the normal pattern fluctuation time is easy to be shortened, and the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game is easy to be long. By satisfying the three conditions, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time is longer in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state, and winning to the second starting port 12 can be facilitated. As a result, the so-called "base", which is the ratio of the number of balls won to the number of balls fired, is high. Therefore, in the time-saving state with a high base, it is possible to aim for a big hit without significantly reducing the number of game balls possessed compared to the normal game state. That is, it can be said that the time-saving state is more advantageous for the player than the non-time-saving state.

In addition, in a time saving state, you may make it meet only a one part condition, without meeting all the three conditions for opening time per unit time of the 2nd starting port 12 to become long. Ultimately, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time is longer than in the non-time saving state, and the winning to the second start port 12 should be facilitated.

Also, in the time saving state, such as making it easier to select a special figure variation pattern with a short special figure variation time compared to the non-time saving state, the number of times the special figure variable display is executed per unit time is small, or special The average of the figure fluctuation time may be made low. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace at which the special figure suspension is digested becomes faster, and the effective winning to the starting opening (the winning that can be stored as the special figure suspension) is more likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game.

In the following, each specific game state is associated with the content of the advantage for the player, the first specific game state is referred to as "high probability high base game state", and the second specific game state is referred to as "high probability low Base game state” and the third specific game state are also referred to as “low probability high base game state”. Furthermore, the normal game state is also referred to as "low probability low base game state".

Therefore, the low probability low base gaming state can be said to be a gaming state controlled in the normal probability state and non-time saving state. Similarly, the low probability high base game state is normal probability state and time saving state, the high probability low base game state is high probability state and non time saving state, and the high probability high base game state is high probability state and time saving state. It can be said that there is a game state.

Thus, the pachinko gaming machine PY can be controlled in a low-probability low-base game state, a low-probability high-base game state, a high-probability low-base game state, a high-probability high-base game state, and a jackpot game state. In the jackpot game state, the jackpot game state is also advantageous to the player because the jackpot 14 is open for a long time and a large amount of game balls can be obtained. Therefore, the jackpot game state and the specific game state can also be called "advantageous game state" which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state.

The high-probability high-base game state and the high-probability low-base game state are game states that are more advantageous to the player than the low-probability low-base game state in that the jackpot probability is higher than the normal probability state. be. In addition, the high-probability high-base game state and the low-probability high-base game state are more advantageous to the player than the low-probability low-base game state in that the ease of winning the second start port 12 is higher than the non-time-saving state. It is in play state. Furthermore, in the jackpot game state, the jackpot game state is a low-probability low-base game because the jackpot game state is a low-probability low-base game because the jackpot game state opens the jackpot 14 in which the number of prize balls per winning is greater than the first start port 11 and the second start port 12. It is a game state more advantageous to the player than the state.

Also, when the power of the pachinko game machine PY is turned on, the normal game state is set first. Also, the jackpot game state is set by performing the stop display of the jackpot symbols. On the other hand, the specific game state is set when a jackpot is won and a jackpot game is executed. Next, the setting of the specific game state will be explained.

3-5. Setting of Specific Game State The pachinko gaming machine PY can newly set a specific game state upon completion of the jackpot game. That is, after the jackpot game, the game can be controlled and progressed in the specific game state. The duration of this specific game state can be set appropriately. For example, the specific game state can be continued until the next big hit is won. Also, it is possible to limit the period during which the specific game state can be continued.

When the duration of the specific game state is limited, the specific game state can be terminated when the end condition for the duration is met. Then, when the specific game state ends, the normal game state can be set. Further, as for the high-probability high-base game state, when the end condition is established, the low-probability high-base game state or the high-probability low-base game state can be set. In this case, the newly set low-probability high-base game state or high-probability low-base game state may be continued until the next big win is won. Also, the same or different end conditions may be provided for the newly set low-probability high-base game state or high-probability low-base game state, and when the end condition is established, the normal game state may be set.

Also, the termination condition for the continuation period of the specific game state can be appropriately set. As the termination condition, for example, the number of executions of the special figure variable display can be set. In addition, not limited to the number of executions of the special figure variable display, the elapsed time after the jackpot game, the number of game balls shot after the jackpot game, the number of passages to the gate 13 after the jackpot game, or whether to end the specific game state An end condition can be set such as derivation of the result of termination in a lottery (so-called “drop lottery”) to determine whether or not. Furthermore, these elements may be set as the termination condition independently or may be set in combination.

These end conditions may be set identically for all specific game states that can be set after the jackpot game, or set for some of the specific game states that can be set. You can Furthermore, the end condition may be changed for each specific game state.

Furthermore, the specific game state controlled after the jackpot game, the presence or absence of the end condition, and the content of the end condition can be associated with the jackpot symbol type related to the jackpot game. For example, when the jackpot pattern type is set as described above, as shown in FIG. The game may be controlled by the state. Here, this high-probability high-base game state can be continued until a jackpot is won without providing an end condition. Furthermore, the game may be controlled in a low-probability high base game state after the end of the big-hit game relating to the big-hit symbol C and the big-hit symbol E. Here, an end condition can be provided for this low-probability high-base game state, and the end condition can be set to a special figure variable display of 100 times. It should be noted that the relationship between this jackpot type symbol and the specific game state controlled after the jackpot game, presence/absence of an end condition, and the content of the end condition is an example, and is not limited to this.

Further, paying attention to the game profit of the jackpot, the jackpot in which the game progresses in a high probability state after the jackpot game is also called "high probability jackpot". Furthermore, a jackpot in which a game progresses in a high-probability state and a time-saving state after a jackpot game is also referred to as a "probable variable jackpot". In addition, the jackpot in which the game progresses in the normal probability state and the time saving state after the jackpot game is also called "time saving jackpot".

4. Main Effects by Game Machine Next, main effects performed by the pachinko game machine PY will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 32. FIG.

4-1. Production Mode First, the production mode will be described. The production mode is a division of production (or a higher-level attribute). The pachinko game machine PY can set, as production modes, a customer waiting production mode, a normal production mode, a probability variable production mode, a short working hours production mode and a jackpot production mode.

In the customer waiting production mode, a special figure variable display is performed in the "low probability low base game state", "low probability high base game state", "high probability low base game state" and "high probability high base game state". It is a production mode that can be set when there is no special figure variable display and indicates that it is in a standby state. A customer waiting performance is performed when the customer waiting performance mode is set. In the customer waiting effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 16A, a customer waiting demonstration animation G100 introducing the pachinko gaming machine PY is displayed on the display section 50a. Further, when the first effect button 40k is operated while the customer waiting demonstration video G100 is being displayed, as shown in FIG. is displayed. Settings related to effects include setting the volume of sound output from the speaker 52, setting the brightness of the display section 50a, and setting the frequency of effects to be executed. It should be noted that the setting items related to effects can be set as appropriate. It is also possible to prevent the setting screen G101 from being displayed by the player's operation from the customer waiting demonstration video G100.

The normal production mode can be set in the "low probability low base game state", and is a production mode indicating that it is in the normal game state. Further, it is possible to provide a plurality of subordinate production modes belonging to the normal production mode. For example, a first normal effect mode, a second normal effect mode, a third normal effect mode, and the like can be provided as lower-level effect modes belonging to the normal effect mode.

In addition, below, the production|presentation mode of the hierarchy of the lower rank which belongs to production|presentation mode is also called "production stage." Along with that, the first normal production mode is also called "first normal production stage", the second normal production mode is also called "second normal production stage", and the third normal production mode is also called "third normal production stage". say. In addition, unless there are special circumstances, basically after the power of the pachinko game machine PY is turned on, the production mode set when the special figure fluctuation display is started for the first time is the first normal production stage ( 1st normal production mode). However, the type of effect mode that is set first is not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate.

When a plurality of production stages belonging to the normal production mode are provided in this manner, the production stages can be repeatedly switched in order when a predetermined switching condition is satisfied. The switching condition can be set as appropriate. For example, the switching condition can be set so that the special figure variable effect is performed a predetermined number of times without winning the jackpot. Furthermore, as a switching condition, it is also possible to set that a specific effect such as a special figure variation effect based on SP reach loss variation is executed.

In addition, as will be described later, reach may occur in the special figure fluctuation production, but the special figure fluctuation production is established for the entire section of the special figure fluctuation production when the reach does not occur, and the reach when the reach occurs. It can be divided into a front part before the reach and a rear part after the reach is established when the reach occurs. The former part is composed of the above-mentioned "normal variation".

Then, in the front part of the first normal effect stage, the background image (FIG. 17A: first normal background image G111) mainly representing the scenery of the city is displayed on the display section 50a. In the front part of the second normal effect stage, the background image (FIG. 17B: second normal background image G112) mainly representing the ground of the baseball field is displayed on the display section 50a. In the front part of the third normal production stage, a background image (FIG. 17C: third normal background image G113) mainly representing the inside of the restaurant is displayed on the display section 50a. On the other hand, in the latter part of the first normal effect stage to the third normal effect stage, the first normal background image G111, the second normal background image G112, and the third normal background image G113 are not displayed, and in the normal effect mode A dedicated background image is displayed according to the type of reach.

The dedicated background image corresponding to the type of reach in the normal production mode may be a background image common to the normal production mode regardless of the type of production stage, or may be a different background image for each production stage.

In addition, the normal production mode can be set even in the "high probability low base game state", and the normal production mode may be a production mode indicating that it is a non-time saving state. Alternatively, it may be set only in the "high-probability low base game state", a predetermined effect mode different from the normal effect mode may be provided. Furthermore, in the low-probability low-base game state and the high-probability low-base game state that occur under certain conditions, a predetermined effect mode different from the normal effect mode may be set.

The probability variation production mode can be set in the "high probability high base game state", and is a production mode indicating that it is a high probability high base game state. In the first part of the probability variation production mode, for example, as shown in FIG. . Also, in the latter part of the variable probability production mode, a dedicated background image corresponding to the type of reach in the variable probability production mode is displayed.

The time-saving performance mode can be set in the "low-probability high-base game state" or "high-probability high-base game state", and is either the low-probability high-base game state or the high-probability high-base game state, and is at least time-saving. It is a production mode indicating that it is in a state. In the former part of the time-saving effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. . In addition, in the latter part of the time saving production mode, a dedicated background image corresponding to the type of reach in the time saving production mode is displayed.

It should be noted that the time-saving production mode is set only in the low-probability high base game state, and can also be a production mode indicating that it is in the low-probability high base game state.

In addition, for either or any one of the variable probability production mode and the short production time production mode, as in the normal production mode, a plurality of production stages for the production mode are further provided, and when a predetermined switching condition is satisfied, the production stage is switched. You can do it.

The jackpot production mode is a production mode that can be set when a jackpot game is being performed in the "jackpot game state", and is a production mode indicating that the jackpot game is being performed. In the jackpot performance mode, for example, during the opening of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 18A, an opening image G1 suggesting the start of the jackpot game and a right-hand shot image G2 prompting "right-hand shot" are displayed on the display unit 50a. A jackpot opening production is displayed. In addition, during the opening, a background image (opening background image G200) corresponding to the type of the jackpot game is displayed on the display unit 50a as a jackpot opening effect in the background of the opening image G1 and the right-handed image G2. .

Further, in the jackpot effect mode, as shown in FIG. 18(B), during the round game in the jackpot game, the display unit 50a continuously displays the right shot image G2 from the opening and the round image indicating the number of rounds. A round effect is performed in which G3 and a number-of-balls image G4 suggesting the number of balls paid out are displayed. In addition, during the round game, as a round effect, the display unit 50a displays a background image (background for round An image G201) is displayed, and BGM corresponding to the type of the jackpot game is output from the speaker 52.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, during the ending of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 18(C), the display unit 50a indicates the ending image G5 indicating the production mode set after the jackpot game and the total number of awarded balls. A jackpot ending production is performed in which a total winning ball number image G6 is displayed. In addition, during the ending, a background image (ending background image G202) corresponding to the type of the jackpot game is displayed in the background of the ending image G5 and the total number of winning balls image G6 on the display unit 50a as a jackpot ending effect. be done.

In the following, the jackpot opening effect, the round effect, and the jackpot ending effect are collectively referred to as "jackpot game effect" as the effect executed in the big win game. That is, a big hit game effect is performed in the big win effect mode.

4-2. Special figure fluctuation production Next, the special figure fluctuation production will be described. When the variable display of the special figure is started, the pachinko machine PY has a special figure variation pattern and a special figure lottery result related to the variable display of the special figure (jackpot determination result, jackpot pattern type determination result, reach determination result, and Based on the special figure fluctuation pattern determination result) etc., the special figure fluctuation production is executed.

In the special figure variation effect, the variation display of the effect symbol is performed in the display unit 50a so as to be superimposed on a predetermined background image. In the variable display of performance symbols, the game stops after the performance symbols are varied. That is, after the special figure fluctuation time and the variable display of the effect design are performed, the variation is stopped and the stop display of the effect design is performed. And, basically, the result of the special figure lottery is informed by the stop display of the production design.

It should be noted that, in the special figure variation effect performed by the display unit 50a, it is possible to use an image other than the variation display of the effect symbol. Furthermore, in addition to the image display device 50 including the display unit 50a, a special effect device using various production devices such as a speaker 52, a frame lamp 53, a board movable device 55, a first production button device 40, and a second production button device 41 It is possible to perform figure variation effects.

Next, the effect symbol displayed on the display unit 50a will be described in the special figure variation effect executed according to the special figure variable display. The production pattern is also identification information for indicating the special figure lottery result, and is provided in a plurality of types. In detail, one of the constituent elements of the performance design constitutes identification information for indicating the special figure lottery result, and a plurality of types of performance design are provided according to the difference in the identification information.

For example, as shown in FIG. 19(A), it is possible to configure nine performance symbols by configuring the performance symbols from numbers 1 to 9. Then, the production design including the number "1" is set as the production design G10a. Similarly, the performance symbols including numbers "2" to "9" are designated as performance symbols G10b to G10e. For the sake of convenience, when dealing with individual production designs without distinction, they are collectively referred to as "production designs G10".

Also, the number portions of the production symbols G10c and G10g related to "3" and "7" are red, and "1", "2", "4", "5", "6", "8", and The number portions of the effect symbols G10a, G10b, G10d, G10e, G10f, G10h, and G10i of "9" are blue. That is, a color is included in the component of the production pattern G10. It should be noted that the configuration of the production pattern G10 and what the identification information is set to may be changed as appropriate. For example, you may add other components, such as a character matched with each number, to the production|presentation design G10.

Next, the effect symbol display area for displaying the effect symbol G10 will be described. For example, as shown in FIG. 19(B), the left side, the center and the right side of the display unit 50a are divided into three substantially evenly in the horizontal direction. It can be a region 50b3. A production design G10 is displayed in each of the left production design area 50b1, the middle production design area 50b2, and the right production design area 50b3.

Mainly, in the first stage part of the special figure fluctuation production, the production design G10 displayed in the left production design area 50b1 is collectively referred to as "left production design EZ1", and the production design G10 displayed in the middle production design area 50b2. The effect symbol G10 displayed in the right effect symbol area 50b3 is collectively referred to as "the middle effect symbol EZ2" and the "right effect symbol EZ3". That is, in the left production design area 50b1, the middle production design area 50b2, and the right production design area 50b3, the production design G10 consisting of the numbers 1 to 9 is commonly displayed, but the production design in the relative display position. When distinguishing G10, it is described as a left effect symbol EZ1, a middle effect symbol EZ2, and a right effect symbol EZ3.

In addition, as will be described later, in the special figure fluctuation production, the variation display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, but finally, the special figure lottery result (jackpot determination result, jackpot pattern type, reach determination result) is shown. The stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed in the mode. Then, when notifying a big hit as a result of the special lottery, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed so that three performance symbols G10 with the same number are arranged side by side (so-called "double eyes"). Therefore, hereinafter, the effect pattern G10 composed of the same numbers constituting the effect patterns EZ1 to EZ3 stopped and displayed when informing a big win is referred to as a "big win effect pattern". For example, when the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed as "7.7.7", the jackpot production pattern is "production pattern G10g", and when they are stopped as "9.9.9", the jackpot production pattern is " production pattern G10i”. Further, the jackpot effect design may be abbreviated by the number included in the effect design. For example, if the big-hit production pattern is "production pattern G10g", the big-hit production pattern is "7", and if the big-hit production pattern is "production pattern G10i", the big-hit production pattern is "9". In addition, as will be described later, in the special figure fluctuation production, the special figure lottery result is completely shown when the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are definitely stopped and displayed. However, basically, in the middle of the special figure fluctuation production, before the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 are definitely stopped and displayed, the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed (temporary stop display). This is because the contents of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 temporarily stopped and displayed once may be changed. For example, after the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a mode showing a certain jackpot (relatively disadvantageous to the player), they are changed to a mode showing another jackpot (relatively advantageous to the player). may be Therefore, when the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed (before being changed) in such a manner that the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 initially indicate a big hit, the performance symbols G10 consisting of the same numbers constituting the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3. Also referred to as "jackpot effect pattern".

In addition, in the special figure fluctuation performance, the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, but in the middle of the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3, the left performance symbol EZ1 and the right performance symbol EZ3 are the same number performance symbols G10. Reach may be performed with a temporary stop display (temporary stop display). As will be described later, the ready-to-win is an effect suggesting that there is a possibility of entering a jackpot gaming state, and by performing the ready-to-win, the chance for the big win is increased. Therefore, the effect symbol G10 composed of the same numbers constituting the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3 related to reach is called "ready-to-win effect symbol". For example, when the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed with the effect symbol G10a of "1", the ready-to-win effect symbol becomes "effect symbol G10a", and the temporary stop display is performed with the effect symbol G10a of "3". , the ready-to-win production pattern is "production pattern G10c". Further, the ready-to-win production pattern may be abbreviated by the number included in the production pattern. For example, if the ready-to-win performance symbol is "performance symbol G10a", the ready-to-win performance symbol is abbreviated as "1", and if the ready-to-win performance symbol is "performance symbol G10c", the ready-to-win performance symbol is abbreviated as "3".

Further, as shown in FIG. 19B, a small pattern area 50c for variably displaying a small pattern can be provided in one section of the left end (lower left corner) of the lower end portion of the display portion 50a. In the small design area 50c, the small design can be variably displayed according to the variable display of the special symbol. The design of the small pattern can be appropriately set, but for example, the number part of the effect pattern G10 can be reduced as it is.

In addition, in FIG. 19(B), the left effect pattern region 50b1, the middle effect pattern region 50b2, the right effect pattern region 50b3, and the small pattern region 50c are indicated by dashed lines. These are shown to represent the ranges of the middle effect symbol area 50b2, the right effect symbol area 50b3, and the small symbol area 50c, and are not actually displayed.

In addition, as described above, there are normal fluctuation, N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle effects as effects that constitute the effect flow of the special figure fluctuation effect. Some of these are described here.

4-2-1. Normal variation The pachinko game machine PY can perform normal variation first in the special figure variation effect. The normal variation functions as an effect suggesting that the variable display of the special figure has started. Next, normal variation will be specifically described. As small patterns, left small pattern KZ1, medium and small pattern KZ2, and right small pattern KZ3 corresponding to left effect pattern EZ1, middle effect pattern EZ2, and right effect pattern EZ3 are variably displayed in the small pattern area 50c.

For example, as shown in FIG. 20(A), in the display section 50a, the left effect symbol EZ1, the middle effect symbol EZ2 and the right effect symbol EZ3 are stopped and displayed, and the left small symbol KZ1, the medium and small symbol KZ2 and the right small symbol are displayed. The symbol KZ3 is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the special figure is not performed, and from the state of waiting for the variable display of the special figure, when the variable display of the special figure is started, FIG. 20 (B) As shown in , the special figure fluctuation effect is started along with the start. Specifically, the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is started, and the variable display of the left small pattern KZ1, the middle and small pattern KZ2 and the right small pattern KZ3 is started.

The display mode of the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 can be made different from the display mode of the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3. For example, the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed by scrolling the respective performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 from the top to the bottom of the display section 50a, and the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is performed by scrolling the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3. It is also possible to change the position one after another at a fixed position. Incidentally, the display mode of the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the display mode of the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 may be made the same.

Further, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are variably displayed at a high speed immediately after the variable display is started. While the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are variably displayed at high speed, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are basically background images such as the background images G111 to G114. is displayed with transparency for easy viewing.

Then, if the special figure variation pattern of the variable display of this special figure is a special figure variation pattern of no reach loss (for example, normal loss variation), the end of the variable display of the special figure (special figure stop display), stop display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is performed in the losing eyes peculiar to the reachless losing (so-called "breaking eyes").

For the stop display of the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3, for example, first, as shown in FIG. As shown in 20(D), the right effect symbol EZ3 is temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) at approximately the center position in the vertical direction, and further, as shown in FIG. Temporarily stop (temporary stop) at the center position.

Finally, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3, which are temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) while lined up in the horizontal direction at the approximately center position in the vertical direction, are completely completed all at once, as shown in FIG. 20(F). , and the stop is confirmed (the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed). When the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 that have been temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) are completely stopped by loose stitches, that is, when the final stop display of the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, three small patterns KZ1 to KZ3 is stopped all at once with the same loose stitches as the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3, and the stop display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is also performed.

It should be noted that the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped means that the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 do not move greatly as in the case of scroll display, but sway slightly or reciprocate slightly on the spot. Therefore, strictly speaking, the state in which the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed is different from the state in which the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 are definitely stopped and displayed. A definitive stop indication may be broadly referred to as a “stop indication”. Also, in the example of FIG. 20, when the stop display of the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the production patterns are stopped in the order of the left production pattern EZ1 → right production pattern EZ3 → middle production pattern EZ2, but the order of stopping ( method) is not limited to this, and can be set as appropriate.

4-2-2. Reach Next, establishment of reach will be described. Even if the special figure fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is a special figure fluctuation pattern (for example, N loss fluctuation) with reach, basically in the same manner as the case of no reach described above, in the display unit 50a, As shown in FIG. 21(A), the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are definitely stopped and displayed, and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed. As shown in FIG. 21(B), the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is started, and the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is also started.

After that, after a predetermined period of time has passed, as shown in FIG. As shown in 21(D), the right performance symbols EZ3 related to the same number "5" are aligned horizontally at substantially the center position in the vertical direction and are temporarily stopped (provisionally stopped), and ready-to-win is established. When reach is established, an image (image suggesting reach establishment) G11 indicating that reach is established is displayed. Incidentally, even if the reach is established with the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3, the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are continuously displayed in a variable manner.

Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 21, when the ready-to-win is established, the production symbols are temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) in the order of the left production pattern EZ1 → the right production pattern EZ3, but the order (method) of the temporary stop is this. can be set as appropriate. Also, the number of the production pattern that constitutes the ready-to-win is not limited to "5". Further, the position for provisionally stopping (temporary stopping) is not limited to the substantially center position in the vertical direction. Also, the direction in which the performance symbols constituting the ready-to-win are arranged is not limited to the horizontal direction, and may be another direction such as an oblique direction.

In this way, the entire period of the special figure fluctuation production in the case of no reach loss and the interval from the start of the special figure fluctuation production to the establishment of the reach when reach occurs can be made normal fluctuation. However, the time until the reach is established can be appropriately set based on the special figure variation pattern. Furthermore, it is also possible to execute various announcement effects such as a so-called "pseudo-continuation", a cut-in announcement, a line announcement, etc. until the ready-to-win is established. Alternatively, it is possible to plunge into a so-called "zone" until reach is established.

4-2-3. N reach The pachinko game machine PY can perform N reach when reach is established after normal variation. The N-reach is an effect suggesting that the lottery result of the special lottery may have been a "big win", and functions as an effect for making the player expect a big win. Next, the N reach will be specifically described.

When reach is established, for example, as shown in FIG. 21(D), N reach is performed from that point. In the N reach, as shown in FIG. 22A, the state when the reach is established is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). When the N-reach is started, as shown in FIG. 22(B), the middle effect symbol EZ2 that is displayed (scrolled) at high speed in the normal mode gradually decelerates.

When the special figure variation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is the special figure variation pattern of the loss with reach (for example, N loss variation), from the state where the reach is established, the middle production pattern EZ2 is provisionally at the vertical direction approximately center position Stop (temporary stop) at the end and stop display of the production pattern indicating the loss is performed. At this time, since the reach is established, as shown in FIG. 22 (C-1), a middle production pattern consisting of numbers ("4" in FIG. 22 (C-1)) different from the numbers constituting the reach EZ2 temporarily stops. Then, with the end of the variable display of the special figure (stop display of the special figure), as shown in FIG. 22 (D), the temporary stop state becomes a complete stop state. Stop display of the left effect symbol EZ1, the middle effect symbol EZ2 and the right effect symbol EZ3 is performed.

In addition, when the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that have been temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) are completely stopped by the losing eyes peculiar to the loss with reach, that is, when the stop display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, 3 The two small patterns KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped all at once with the same losing pattern with reach as the effect patterns EZ1 to EZ3, and the stop display of the small patterns KZ1 to KZ3 is also performed. Note that the content of N reach can be changed or added as appropriate.

When the special figure fluctuation production does not end with N reach, as shown in FIG. Reach may develop (switch) to L reach or SP reach.

4-2-4. L reach Pachinko game machine PY can perform L reach after N reach. The L reach is an effect suggesting that the possibility of the result of the special lottery being a "big win" is higher than the N reach, and functions as an effect for making the player expect a big win. It should be noted that even in the L reach, established reach is maintained, for example, as shown in FIG. Moves to a predetermined position (for example, the left effect symbol EZ1 is at the upper left of the display portion 50a and the right effect symbol EZ3 is at the upper right of the display portion 50a) that does not overlap the small symbol area 50c in the portion 50a.

Further, at the start of the L reach, for example, as shown in FIG. 23A, a background image exclusively for the L reach (L reach background image G114) is displayed on the display unit 50a. The L-reach background image G114 is composed of a moving image in which a predetermined Three is deployed. The content of the story of the moving image related to the L-reach background image G114 can be set as appropriate, but in the basic embodiment, the main character confesses to a girl.

When the L-reach background image G114 is displayed, first, as shown in FIG. 23A, the scene starts with the main character waiting for a girl at a certain meeting place. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 23B, a girl appears at the meeting place. At this time, at substantially the center of the display portion 50a, as the middle effect pattern EZ2, the effect pattern of the number "5" forming the reach and the effect pattern of the number "4" not forming the reach appear. Then, it rotates slowly so that it comes out from the back side to the front side and then returns to the back side.

While the production pattern of number "4" and the production pattern of number "5" are continuously rotated, the three related to the background image G114 for L reach advances. Then, as shown in FIG. 23(C), the main character confesses to the girl. At this time, at the approximate center of the display part 50a, the effect pattern of the number "5" which constitutes the reach and the effect pattern of the number "4" which does not constitute the reach mutually repel the opponent. collide with. Since the production pattern of the number "5" constitutes the reach, and the production pattern of the number "4" does not constitute the reach, the production pattern of the number "4" is flipped off and the production pattern of the number "5" is replaced. If it remains, the stop display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 indicating a big win is established, while if the performance symbol of the number "5" is flipped away and the performance symbol of the number "4" remains, the performance of the mode indicating reach-losing. The stop display of the symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is established. Therefore, the scene of FIG. 23(C) is the final stage of the L-reach, and a production suggesting a big hit (jackpot suggesting production) is executed or a production suggesting a loss (loss suggesting production) is executed. It constitutes a branch point (so-called “hit-lose branch point”) where it branches.

At the win-lose branch point, if the special figure variation pattern of the special figure variable display is the jackpot variation (L jackpot variation), as shown in FIG. After the display, as shown in FIG. 24(B-1), the main character who is pleased with the successful confession is displayed, and the speaker 52 outputs a predetermined sound effect. At this time, together with the left effect pattern EZ1 and the right effect pattern EZ3 of the number "5" constituting the reach, the medium effect pattern EZ2 of the number "5" constituting the reach are temporarily stopped at the center of the display part 50a. displayed in the form. That is, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a big win.

The display of the main character who is pleased with the successful confession and the output of a predetermined sound effect constitutes a big win suggestive presentation. After the big hit suggesting effect, as shown in FIG. 24 (C-1), the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is performed in a manner indicating the big win.

On the other hand, after the winning branch point, if the special figure variation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is a loss variation with reach (L loss variation), the background image G114 for L reach is displayed without a jackpot suggestion effect. As shown in 24(A-2), the display unit 50a displays a close-up of a girl with a sad expression, and then, as shown in FIG. 24(B-2), she fails to confess and is disappointed. A main character is displayed. At this time, along with the left production pattern EZ1 and the right production pattern EZ3 of the number "5" which constitutes the reach, the middle production pattern EZ2 of the number "5" which does not constitute the reach is temporarily stopped in the center of the display part 50a. is displayed. That is, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating reach-losing.

The display of the main character who has failed in confession and is disappointed constitutes a failure suggestive presentation. After the loss suggesting effect, as shown in FIG. 24(C-2), stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is performed with the losing eyes for ready-to-win.

4-2-5. SP reach In addition, the pachinko game machine PY can perform SP reach after N reach. The SP reach is an effect suggesting that the possibility of the result of the special lottery being a "big win" is higher than the L reach, and functions as an effect for making the player expect a big win. It should be noted that even in SP reach, established reach is maintained, for example, as shown in FIG. Moves to a predetermined position (for example, the left effect symbol EZ1 is at the upper left of the display portion 50a and the right effect symbol EZ3 is at the upper right of the display portion 50a) that does not overlap the small symbol area 50c in the portion 50a.

Further, at the start of the SP reach, for example, as shown in FIG. 25A, a background image dedicated to the SP reach (SP reach background image G115) is displayed on the display unit 50a. The SP reach background image G115 is composed of a moving image in which a predetermined Thule develops. The content of the story of the moving image related to the background image G115 for SP reach can be set as appropriate, but in the basic embodiment, the main character and an enemy character who are rivals of the main character face each other. ing. The main character is a baseball pitcher, and the enemy character is a baseball batter.

When the SP reach background image G115 is displayed, first, as shown in FIG. 25A, an enemy character appears, and then, as shown in FIG. An image (SP reach start title image) G11 indicating that SP reach has started is displayed. The SP reach start title image G11 is composed of a title image G11a representing the title of the SP reach "In FIG. be.

Next, as shown in FIG. 25C, a scene in which the main character and the enemy character are facing each other is displayed. After that, in the SP reach background image G115, as shown in FIG. 26A, the main character throws the ball, and as shown in FIG. As shown in C), the enemy character starts swinging the bat. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 26(D), the ball and the bat approach each other, and the confrontation between the main character and the enemy character comes to an end. This scene constitutes a branching point (win-lose branching point) at which the main character wins in the confrontation between the pitcher and the batter, suggesting a big win, or loses, suggesting a loss.

After this win-lose branch point, if the special figure variation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is a big hit variation (SP jackpot variation), as shown in FIG. After winning the confrontation, as shown in FIG. 27(B-1), the main character strikes out the enemy character and yells on the mound, and a predetermined sound effect is output from the speaker 52. be done. At this time, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a big hit.

The display of the main character screaming after winning the confrontation and the output of a predetermined sound effect constitute the big win suggestive presentation. After the big hit suggesting effect, as shown in FIG. 27 (C-1), the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is performed in a manner indicating the big win.

27 ( As shown in A-2), the enemy character hits a home run and loses the confrontation, and as shown in FIG. 27(B-2), the main character is disappointed on the mound. At this time, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating reach loss.

The display of the main character who is disappointed after being defeated in the confrontation constitutes a failure suggestive effect. After the losing indication effect, as shown in FIG. 27(C-2), stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is performed with the losing eyes for ready-to-win.

Next, the movable body production and the operation production performed in the special figure fluctuation production will be described. The movable body production and the operation production are the above-mentioned SP reach, L reach, and N reach, and even when they are performed as part of these productions in the form of being incorporated in the jackpot game production, etc., and independently of these productions. may be performed. First, the movable body production will be described.

4-3. Movable body effect The pachinko game machine PY is capable of performing a movable body effect involving the action of the movable body at a predetermined timing in a predetermined effect such as a special figure variation effect or a jackpot game effect. The movable body production is, for example, a production using a movable device such as the board movable device 55, and functions as a production that suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit or development to SP reach.

For example, when the movable body production functions as a production that suggests development to SP reach, as shown in FIG. As shown in (B), the board movable device 55 is activated, and the board movable body 55k is lowered to the operating position in a front view, and held at that position for a predetermined time. Furthermore, at this time, an effect image G13 associated with the operation of the board movable body 55k is also displayed on the entire display section 50a. Then, as shown in FIG. 28C, the effect image G13 is erased, the board movable body 55k rises to the standby position, and the board movable device 55 returns to the normal standby state. When the board movable device 55 returns to the normal standby state, it develops into SP reach. In addition, it is possible to appropriately change or add the operation contents of the movable device in the movable body presentation.

4-4. Operation Effect Next, the operation effect will be described. The pachinko game machine PY provides an operation promotion effect and an operation result effect according to the operation of the first effect button 40k, the second effect button 41k, etc. at a predetermined timing in a predetermined effect such as a special figure fluctuation effect or a big hit game effect. It is possible to perform operation effects including The operation promotion performance is a performance that prompts the player to operate the operation means, and the operation result performance is a performance that is performed in response to the operation of the operation means in the operation promotion performance. It works as a performance.

For example, as described above, when the hit-drop branch point is reached in L reach or SP reach, a period during which the pressing operation of the first effect button 40k is valid (operation valid period) occurs, and with the occurrence of this operation valid period , as shown in FIG. 29A, an effect (operation prompting effect) for prompting the operation of the first effect button 40k is performed.

In the operation promotion effect, a first effect button operation promotion effect image G12 is displayed on the display section 50a. The first effect button operation promotion effect image G12 includes an image (operation target image) G12a representing the first effect button 40k to be operated, and an image (pressing An operation image) G12b and an image (operation valid period remaining time image) G12c representing the remaining time of the operation valid period (operation valid period) related to the operation of the first effect button 40k.

Note that the operation valid period remaining time image G12c is composed of a generally curved progress bar, and changes with the passage of time so that the player can easily understand the remaining time of the operation valid period. Note that FIG. 29B shows a state in which the effective operation period has occurred and 1/3 of the effective operation time has elapsed.

Then, when the special figure variation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is a jackpot variation (SP jackpot variation), after the first production button 40k is pressed in the operation valid period, or the first production button in the operation valid period After the remaining time of the operation valid period expires without the operation of 40k, the operation result presentation is performed.

As an operation result presentation, for example, as shown in FIG. rotates for a predetermined time. In this way, the operation result presentation also includes the movable body presentation. Further, at this time, an effect image G13 associated with the movement of the board movable body 55k is displayed on the entire display section 50a as an operation result presentation. Then, as shown in FIG. 29(D), the effect image G13 is erased, the rotation of the rotary member 55k1 is stopped, and the board movable body 55k rises, thereby completing the operation result presentation. When the operation result production ends, a jackpot suggestion production is performed.

On the other hand, if the special figure variation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is a reach loss variation (SP loss variation), even if the first production button 40k is pressed during the operation valid period, or the first production button 40k is pressed. Even if the remaining time of the performance button operation effective period expires without being performed, the operation result performance is not performed, and the failure suggesting performance is performed.

Note that the operation result presentation is not limited to the operation of the board movable device 55 and the display of the effect image G13, and can be changed or added as appropriate. Further, the operation performance is not limited to the special figure variation performance, and can be executed in the big hit performance as well.

4-5. Look-Ahead Effect Next, a look-ahead effect that can be executed before the special figure variable display that is the target of the special figure reservation will be described. The pachinko game machine PY is capable of performing a look-ahead performance for the special figure 1 suspension or the special figure 2 suspension in which the big hit determination is not performed based on the result of the look-ahead determination at any timing of the special figure variation performance. . The look-ahead performance is a performance suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win with respect to the special figure 1 reserve or the special figure 2 reserve, and functions as a performance for expecting a big win from before the variable display of the special figure corresponding to the reserve. As an example of the look-ahead effect, there is a pending change notice using a pending effect representing a special figure pending. Here, the suspension effect and the suspension change notice performed in the normal effect mode will be described.

As shown in FIG. 30A, the suspension effect is performed in a suspension display area 50d formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a substantially central section of the lower end of the display section 50a. The reserved display area 50d is composed of a first area 50d1, a second area 50d2, a third area 50d3, and a fourth area 50d4, which are obtained by dividing the reserved display area 50d into four substantially evenly in the horizontal direction. That is, in the reservation display area 50d, the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 are arranged in order from the left end to the right end.

In the first area 50d1, the special figure 1 variable display is performed first based on the special figure 1 related random number corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation, which occurs first among the special figure 1 reservations being reserved. A pending icon representing the special figure 1 pending is displayed. Similarly, in the second area 50d2 to the fourth area 50d4, based on the special figure 1 related random number corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation, which occurs second to fourth in the reserved special figure 1 reservation A hold icon representing the special figure 1 hold in which the special figure 1 variable display is performed in the 2nd to 4th is displayed.

In the following, the special figure 1 reservation corresponding to the reservation icon displayed in the first area 50d1 is referred to as "special figure 1 reservation of reservation order 1". Similarly, the second area 50d2, the third area 50d3, and the special figure 1 hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the fourth area 50d4 "reserved order 2 special figure 1 hold", "reserved order 3 of It is called "special figure 1 reservation" and "special figure 1 reservation of reservation order 4". That is, for the existing special figure 1 reservation, it is called "reservation order 1" to "reservation order 4" in the order of occurrence.

A display area 50e is formed to the left of the reserved display area 50d. In the display area 50e, the icon representing the special figure 1 variable display currently being executed is displayed. Therefore, the target indicated by the icon displayed in the display area 50e is different from the target indicated by the hold icon displayed in the hold display area 50d. Although not included, the display of the pending icon and the display of the relevant icon are related, so hereinafter, the display of the pending icon and the display of the relevant icon will be collectively referred to as "holding effect". Also, the pending icon and the icon are collectively referred to as an "icon". Furthermore, the special figure 1 fluctuation display during execution indicated by the icon is also referred to as "the fluctuation".

In FIG. 30(A), the reserved display area 50d and the display area 50e are indicated by dashed lines, and the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 are indicated by broken lines. It is shown to show the range of the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 and the display area 50e, and is not actually displayed.

Next, a specific example of the holding effect will be described. In the following description, variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 will be omitted. As a premise, it is during the special figure 1 variable display (during the special figure variation production), and the number of special figure 1 reservations (U1) is "2". Under this circumstance, as shown in FIG. 30(B), in the first area 50d1 (not shown), the special figure 1 suspension that occurred first among the currently suspended special figure 1 suspension (reservation order 1 special figure 1 suspension) is displayed, and in the second region 50d2 (not shown), the special figure 1 suspension that occurred next to the special figure 1 suspension represented by the suspension icon HA2 (reservation order 2 A pending icon HA3 representing special figure 1 pending) is displayed. In addition, the icon HA1 representing the special figure 1 variable display currently being executed is displayed in the display area 50e (not shown). Note that the display mode of the icons HA1 to HA3 displayed in FIG. 30B is the normal mode.

In this way, in the suspension effect, they are displayed side by side from the left end of the suspension display area 50d to the right in the order in which the special figure 1 suspension has occurred. That is, the variable display of the reserved special symbols, in other words, the variable display of the unexecuted special symbols based on the special symbol related determination information stored in the special symbol suspension storage unit 105 is individually displayed with a suspension icon. be.

Then, as shown in FIG. 30(C), when the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed, the icon HA1 representing the special figure variation display being executed until immediately before is erased. Subsequently, when the variable display of the special symbol (special figure variation effect) is started based on the special figure 1 suspension representing the suspension icon HA2, the suspension icon HA2 and the suspension icon HA3 are shifted. Specifically, the hold icon HA2 displayed in the first area 50d1 (not shown) moves to the display area 50e (not shown), and the hold icon HA3 displayed in the second area 50d2 (not shown) moves to the display area 50e (not shown). to the first area 50d1. That is, the suspended icon HA2 and the suspended icon HA3 that have been displayed are shifted one by one to the left. This is because the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the pending icon HA2 is started, and the special figure 1 pending represented by the pending icon HA3 is the first special figure 1 pending among the currently pending special figures 1 pending. This is to adapt the pending icon HA2 and the pending icon HA3 to the situation in accordance with the special figure variable display to be started next.

In addition, since the pending icon HA2 displayed in the display area 50e represents the special figure 1 variable display being executed, it becomes the icon HA2 when displayed in the display area 50e. That is, as a word before "icon", the icon displayed in the reserved display area 50d is "reserved", and the icon displayed in the display area 50e is "relevant". In other words, when the pending icon is displayed, if the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is established for the special symbol pending indicated by the pending icon, the variable display of the special symbol related to the establishment of the starting condition is started. A corresponding pending icon is displayed as the icon.

When the reserved icon changes to the relevant icon, in other words, when the icon moves from the reserved display area 50d to the relevant display area 50e, the size of the icon may remain the same or may be enlarged. In FIG. 30(C), the icon is enlarged about twice as it moves from the reserved display area 50d to the display area 50e.

Then, from this situation, when the game ball enters the first start port 11 and special figure 1 suspension occurs, as shown in FIG. An icon HA4 is displayed in the aforementioned second area 50d2 (not shown).

In this way, when the special figure 1-related random number is acquired by winning the first starting port 11, one common icon is displayed. This icon is erased when the special figure 1 variable display based on the winning prize ends, but while it is displayed, the state in which the special figure 1 variable display is placed (suspended state and running state) , it will exist under different names (pending icon and the icon in question).

By the way, as described above, the start winning command includes win/fail information and special figure variation pattern information. Then, the pachinko gaming machine PY can display the pending icon in a normal mode or a special mode based on the win/fail information and the special figure variation pattern information. Displaying the suspension icon in a special mode is called "suspension notice".

When the display mode of the pending icon is a special mode, i.e., when the pending notice is given, the player can expect to win a big win by variable display of the special pattern corresponding to the pending icon. Next, a specific example of a hold notice will be described. As a specific example of the pending notice, it is assumed that the display mode of the pending icon HA4 shown in FIG. 30(E) is the special mode.

As one type of pending notice, it becomes a special mode immediately after the pending icon is displayed. There are types. For example, as shown in FIG. 31(A), from the situation (situation of FIG. 30(D)) before the pending icon HA4 is displayed, the game ball wins the first starting port 11, and the special figure 1 pending occurs, similarly to the case of FIG. 30(E), in response to the occurrence of the special figure 1 suspension, the suspension icon HA4 of the normal mode is displayed in the above-described second region 50d2 (not shown). In the drawing, the hold icon in the normal mode appears to be completely stationary, but in reality, basically, even if it is made completely stationary, the display position does not move. It may be configured so as to sway lightly on the ground.

Then, immediately after that, as shown in FIG. 31(B), the display mode of the hold icon HA4 changes from the normal mode to the special mode (gray in FIG. 31(B)) (hold notice is performed). In the example of FIG. 31, the hold icon HA4 is displayed in the normal mode for a moment immediately after being displayed, but it may be displayed in the special mode to eliminate the period of display in the normal mode.

As another type of pending notice, there is a pending notice type that becomes a special mode when the pending icon moves, in other words, a pending notice type in which a pending icon change notice is performed during the shift of the special figure 1 hold. For example, as shown in FIG. 32(A), from the situation (situation of FIG. 30(D)) before the pending icon HA4 is displayed, the game ball wins the first starting port 11, and the special figure 1 pending occurs, as shown in FIG. 32(B), in response to the occurrence of the special figure 1 suspension, the second region 50d2 (not shown) of the normal mode (white in FIG. 32(B)) is displayed as the suspension icon HA4. to be displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 32(C), when the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed, the icon HA2 representing the special figure variation display being executed until immediately before is erased. Subsequently, when the variable display of special symbols (special figure variation effect) is started based on the special figure 1 suspension represented by the suspension icon HA3, it is displayed in the first area 50d1 as shown in FIG. The reserved icon HA3 moves to the display area 50e (not shown), and the reserved icon HA4 displayed in the second area 50d2 moves to the first area 50d1 (not shown). Here, when the hold icon HA4 moves from the second area 50d2 to the first area 50d1, the display mode changes from the normal mode to the special mode (gray in FIG. 32(D)) (hold notice is performed). .

Moreover, it is possible to provide a plurality of types of special modes related to the pending advance notice so that the degree of expectation for a big win differs depending on the type of the special mode. For example, it is assumed that the display mode of the pending icon is associated with the color of the pending icon, and white, green, red, and gold are set as the display mode of the pending icon. Here, white is the normal aspect and green, red, and gold are special aspects. The degree of expectation for a big win indicated by the display mode of the pending icon can be set to increase in the order of white<green<red<gold.

In addition, the look-ahead effect can be performed for both or one of the special figure 1 reservation and the special figure 2 reservation. In addition, the look-ahead effect is not limited to the display mode of the hold icon HA. It is possible to execute using an effect device other than the image display device 50 such as the operation by the device 55 . Furthermore, as the effect mode of the look-ahead effect, in addition to the effect mode that continues without interruption until the special figure fluctuation display is started after being executed, such as a pending icon change notice by the pending icon HA, the effect pattern is stopped. It is also possible to adopt an effect mode that is executed intermittently and continuously, such as each time the display is performed or each time the variable display of the effect symbols is started.

5. Game Control by Game Control Microcomputer 101 [Game Control Main Processing]
Next, game control by the game control microcomputer 101 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 42. FIG. It should be noted that the flowchart for controlling the game described below is an example. A plurality of processes in the flowchart can be executed in parallel or changed in execution order as appropriate within a range in which the contents of the processes are not inconsistent.

In addition, counters, timers, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. appearing in game control by the game control microcomputer 101 described below are provided in the game RAM 104 . The initial value of the counter is "0", the initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", and the initial value of the status is "1".

The game control microcomputer 101 provided on the game control board 100 reads and executes a game control main processing program shown in FIG. 33 from the game ROM 103 when the pachinko game machine PY is powered on. As shown in the figure, in the game control main process, first, power-on process (S001) is performed. In the power-on processing, access permission setting to the game RAM 104, setting of the game CPU 102, SIO (System Input/Output), PIO (Parallel Input/Output), CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit: interrupt time management) circuit) are set.

Following the power-on process, interrupts are prohibited (S002), and a normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003) is executed. In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003), 1 is added to the counter value of various random numbers related to the normal symbol related determination information and the special symbol related determination information and updated. When the counter value of each random number reaches the upper limit, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be changed randomly. At least some of the random numbers may be so-called hardware random numbers generated using a known random number generation circuit such as a counter IC.

When the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003) is completed, an interrupt is permitted (S004). During the interruption permission, it is possible to execute the game control side timer interruption process (S005). The game control side timer interrupt processing (S005) is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the game CPU 102 at a cycle of, for example, 4 msec. That is, the game control side timer interrupt processing (S005) is executed at a cycle of 4 msec. Then, after the game control side timer interrupt processing (S005) is completed, until the next game control side timer interrupt processing (S005) is started, by normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing (S003) Various random number counter values are updated repeatedly. It should be noted that, if an interrupt pulse is input to the game CPU 102 when the interrupt is disabled, the game control side timer interrupt processing (S005) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is permitted (S004). .

[Game control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the game control side timer interrupt processing (S005) will be described. As shown in FIG. 34, in the game control side timer interrupt process (S005), the output process (S101) is first executed. In the output process (S101), commands set in an output buffer provided in the game RAM 104 of the game control board 100 in each process described below are output to the effect control board 120, the payout control board 170, and the like.

In the input process (S102) that follows the output process (S101), the game control microcomputer 101 captures the detection signal from the lower tray full switch for detecting the fullness of the surplus ball storage hole 35A, and uses it as the lower tray fullness data for the game. stored in the output buffer of the RAM 104 for use.

The normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103) performed next is the same as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003) performed in the game control main process of FIG. That is, the updating process of the counter value of various random numbers related to the general figure-related determination information and the special figure-related determination information includes the execution period of the game control side timer interrupt processing (S005) and the other period (main side timer interrupt processing ( After the end of S005), it is performed in both the period until the next game control side timer interrupt processing (S005) is started).

After the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103), the game control microcomputer 101 performs sensor detection process (S104), then performs normal operation process (S105), and further performs special operation process (S106). conduct. Sensor detection processing, normal operation processing, and special operation processing will be described later.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 executes other processing (S107) and terminates the game control side timer interrupt processing (S005). As other processing (S107), a power-off monitoring process when the power is turned off, a timer provided in the game RAM 104, and the like are performed. Further, as other processing (S107), a payout control processing for paying out prize balls to the player is performed. In the payout control process, the prize ball counter for the first start hole 11, the prize ball counter for the second start hole 12, the prize ball counter for the big win hole 14, and the prize ball counter for the general win hole 10 are " It is checked whether or not it exceeds "0", and if it exceeds "0", a prize ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control board 170.例文帳に追加Then, when a prize ball signal is transmitted, update processing is performed to subtract "1" from the prize ball counter associated with the signal.

Then, the game control microcomputer 101 repeatedly executes the processing of steps S002 to S004 of the game control main processing until an interrupt pulse is input to the game CPU 102 next time, and when the interrupt pulse is input (after about 4 msec ), the game control side timer interrupt processing (S005) is executed again. The game control microcomputer 101 is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 in the previous game control side timer interrupt process (S005) in the output process (S101) of the game control side timer interrupt process (S005) executed again. command etc.

[Sensor detection processing]
Next, sensor detection processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36. FIG. In the sensor detection process (S104), first, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the general winning opening 10, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the general winning opening sensor 10a (S201). If the game ball has not entered the general winning hole 10 (NO at S201), the process proceeds to step S203, and if the game ball has entered the general winning hole 10 (YES at S201), a predetermined number of game balls General winning hole prize ball processing for paying out prize balls is performed (S202). In the general winning hole prize ball processing, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning of the general winning hole 10 (“3” in the basic embodiment) is added to the prize ball counter for the general winning hole 10 .

In step S203, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 13, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 13a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 13 (NO in S203), the process proceeds to step S207. On the other hand, if the game ball has passed through the gate 13 (YES in S203), whether or not the normal operation status = 1, which will be described later, in other words, whether either the normal pattern variable display or the auxiliary game is being performed It is determined whether or not (S204). If the normal operation status is not 1 (NO at S204), proceed to step S207, and if the normal operation status is 1 (YES at S204), the counter value of the normal design random number counter (label-TRND-F) (S205), the obtained general pattern random number is stored in the general pattern reservation storage unit 86 provided in the game RAM 104 (S206), and step S207 proceed to

In step S207, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the second start hole 12, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the second start hole sensor 12a. If the game ball has not entered the second start port 12 (NO at S207), the process proceeds to step S214, and if the game ball has entered the second start port 12 (YES at S207), the predetermined A second starting hole prize ball process for paying out the number of prize balls is performed (S208). In the second start hole prize ball processing, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning to the second start hole 12 (“2” in the basic embodiment) is added to the prize ball counter for the second start hole 12 .

Next, the special figure 2 reservation number (specifically, the number of the counter (special figure 2 reservation number counter) that counts the special figure 2 reservation number provided in the game RAM 104) is "4" (upper limit storage number) or more It is determined whether or not there is (S209). If the special figure 2 reservation number is "4" or more (YES in S209), the process proceeds to step S214, but if the special figure 2 reservation number is not "4" or more (is less than "4") ( NO in S209), special figure 2 reservation number addition processing is performed (S210). In the special figure 2 reservation number addition process, "1" is added to the special figure 2 reservation number counter, and the special figure 2 reservation number indicated by the special figure 2 reservation display 83b is increased by "1".

Subsequently, special pattern random number counter (label - TRND-T), jackpot pattern type random number counter (label - TRND-OS), reach random number counter (label - TRND-RC) and special pattern variation pattern random number counter (label - TRND- HP) to acquire the special figure 2 related determination information consisting of, and stored in the special figure related determination information buffer provided in the game RAM 104 (S211).

Next, a second prefetch determination process is performed (S212). In the second look-ahead determination process, the second look-ahead determination table shown in FIG. A second start winning command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 .

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 stores the special figure 2 related determination information acquired in step S211 in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b (S213).

Subsequently, in step S214, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the first start hole 11, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the first start hole sensor 11a. If the game ball has not entered the first start port 11 (NO at S214), the process proceeds to step S221, and if the game ball has entered the first start port 11 (YES at S214), the predetermined A first starting opening prize ball process for paying out the number of prize balls is performed (S215). In the first start hole prize ball processing, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning to the first start hole 11 ("4" in the basic embodiment) is added to the prize ball counter for the first start hole 11.

Next, the special figure 1 reservation number (specifically, the number of the counter (special figure 1 reservation number counter) that counts the number of special figure 1 reservations provided in the game RAM 104) is "4" (upper limit storage number) or more (S216). If the special figure 1 reservation number is "4" or more (YES in S216), the process proceeds to step S221, but if the special figure 1 reservation number is not "4" or more (less than) (NO in S216 ), special figure 1 reservation number addition processing is performed (S217). In the special figure 1 reservation number addition process, "1" is added to the special figure 1 reservation number counter, and the special figure 1 reservation number indicated by the special figure 1 reservation display 83a is increased by "1".

Subsequently, special pattern random number counter (label - TRND-T), jackpot pattern type random number counter (label - TRND-OS), reach random number counter (label - TRND-RC) and special pattern variation pattern random number counter (label - TRND- HP) to acquire the special figure 1 related determination information consisting of, and stored in the special figure related determination information buffer provided in the game RAM 104 (S218).

Next, a first prefetch determination process is performed (S219). In the first look-ahead determination process, the first look-ahead determination table shown in FIG. A first start winning command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 .

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 stores the special figure 1 related determination information acquired in step S218 in a storage area corresponding to the current number of special figure 1 reservations in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a (S220).

In step S221, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the big winning hole 14, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the big winning hole sensor 14a. When the game ball has not entered the big winning hole 14 (NO at S221), the sensor detection process is terminated, and when the game ball has entered the big winning hole 14 (YES at S221) It is determined whether or not the counter value of the provided big winning opening winning counter is equal to or greater than "9" (S222). The big winning opening winning counter is a counter for counting the number of winning big winning openings 14 in one round game of the big winning game. It should be noted that the big winning opening winning counter is cleared every time each round game ends. In the first embodiment, the specified winning number is set to "14". Therefore, the process of step S222 is performed.

If the counter value of the big winning opening winning counter is "11" or more (YES in S222), the sensor detection process is terminated, and the counter value of the big winning opening winning counter is not "11" or more, that is, less than "11". If so (NO in S222), the counter value of the big winning opening winning counter is incremented by "1" (S223), and the big winning opening prize ball processing for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls to the player is performed (S224). ), ending the sensor detection process. In the big winning hole prize ball processing, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning to the big winning hole 14 (“9” in the basic embodiment) is added to the prize ball counter for the big winning hole 14 .

A sensor other than the sensors 10a to 14a is provided as a sensor capable of detecting the game ball, and based on the detection of the game ball by the sensor, processes other than the processes shown in FIGS. 35 to 36 are performed. Also good.

[Normal operation processing]
Next, a description will be given of normal operation processing relating to the control of the normal map display 82 and the electric chew 12D. As shown in FIG. 37, the processing relating to the normal map display 82 and the electric chew 12D is divided into four statuses (steps). "Normal operation status=1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each of these statuses. The game control microcomputer 101 first confirms the "normal operation status" in the normal operation process (S105) (S1101). When the "normal operation status" is "1", normal design standby processing (S1102) is performed, and when the "normal operation status" is "2", normal design variation processing (S1103) is performed, When the "normal operation status" is "3", the normal symbol determination process (S1104) is performed, and when the "normal operation status" is "4", the auxiliary game control process (S1105) is performed. "Normal operation status" is set to "1" by default.

The normal symbol standby process (S1102) is a process performed during standby when the normal symbol variable display and auxiliary game are not performed. In the normal design standby process (S1102), hit determination is performed based on the normal design random number stored in the normal design reservation storage unit 86. Furthermore, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern is determined based on the current game state, and the normal pattern fluctuation pattern is determined, and the normal pattern fluctuation display of the normal pattern fluctuation time corresponding to the determined normal pattern fluctuation pattern is displayed on the normal pattern display 82. and change the normal operation status to "2". Further, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a normal pattern fluctuation start command according to the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination result in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation display.

The normal symbol variation process (S1103) is a process performed when the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In the normal pattern fluctuation process (S1103), it is determined whether or not the normal pattern fluctuation time has elapsed since the normal pattern fluctuation display being executed started (whether or not the normal pattern fluctuation display is terminated). If it is determined that the figure fluctuation time has passed, the normal figure stop display is performed based on the hit determination result, and the normal operation status is changed to "3". Further, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a normal pattern fluctuation stop command in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation display.

The normal design determination process (S1104) is a process performed when the normal pattern is stopped and displayed. In the normal pattern determination process (S1104), whether or not a predetermined stop time (for example, 0.8 seconds) has elapsed since the stop display of the normal pattern being executed started (whether to end the stop display of the normal pattern) or not), and if it is determined that the predetermined stop time has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the normal pattern that is stopped and displayed is a winning pattern. If it is not a winning pattern (if the stopped normal pattern is a losing pattern), the normal operation status is changed to "1". On the other hand, if the winning pattern is stopped and displayed, the normal operation status is changed to "4", and the auxiliary game is started based on the current game state and the auxiliary game control table. Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 101 sets an auxiliary game start command in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 at the start of the auxiliary game.

Auxiliary game control processing (S1105) is processing that is performed when the auxiliary game is being performed. In the auxiliary game control process (S1105), the auxiliary game is controlled based on the current game state and the auxiliary game control table. Then, when the auxiliary game ends, the normal operation status is changed to "1".

[Special action processing]
Next, the special operation processing regarding the control of the special figure indicator 81, the special figure reservation indicator 83 and the big winning device 14D will be described. As shown in FIG. 38, the processing relating to the special figure indicator 81, the special figure reservation indicator 83 and the big winning device 14D is divided into five statuses (steps). "Special action status=1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each of these statuses. The game control microcomputer 101 first confirms the "special action status" (S1501).

When the "special action status" is "1", the game control microcomputer 101 performs special symbol standby processing (S1502), and when the "special action status" is "2", the special symbol variation. Processing (S1503) is performed, and when the "special action status" is "3", a special symbol determination process (S1504) is performed, and when the "special action status" is "4", jackpot game control Processing (S1505) is performed, and when the "special action status" is "5", game state setting processing (S1506) is performed. The "special operation status" is set to "1" by default.

The special symbol standby process (S1502) is a process performed during standby when the special symbol variable display and the jackpot game are not performed. The special symbol standby process will be detailed later.

Special design fluctuation processing (S1503) is the processing which is done when the special design is indicated fluctuatingly. The special symbol variation processing will be detailed later.

The special symbol determination process (S1504) is a process performed when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. The special design confirmation processing will be described in detail later.

The jackpot game control process (S1505) is a process performed in the jackpot game. A game control microcomputer 101 performs a jackpot game according to a jackpot game control table by performing jackpot game control processing. The special action status is changed to "5" when the jackpot game ends. In addition, when each round game is started, a round number designation command indicating the number of rounds is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 . Also, when all the round games are finished and the ending is started, an ending command indicating the ending corresponding to the jackpot pattern related to the jackpot game is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 . The state in which the game control microcomputer 101 sets the special action status "4" and controls the jackpot game is the "jackpot game state", and the fact that the special action status "4" is set is the "jackpot game state”.

The game state setting process (S1506) is a process of setting the game state to be controlled after the big win game when the big win game ends. For example, when controlling in a high probability state after a jackpot game, a high probability flag is turned on in the high probability flag area of the game RAM 104 to set the high probability state. Furthermore, at this time, if the duration of the high-probability state is limited, the duration is also set. For example, if the end condition of the high probability state is the number of executions of the special figure variable display, the number (hereinafter referred to as "high probability specified number of times") is set in the high probability remaining number counter provided in the game RAM 104 . In addition, when controlling in the time saving state after the jackpot game, the time saving flag is turned ON in the time saving flag area of the game RAM 104 to set the time saving state. Furthermore, at this time, when limiting the duration of the time saving state, the duration is also set. For example, when the end condition of the time saving state is the number of executions of the special figure variable display, the number (hereinafter referred to as "time saving specified number of times") is set to the time saving remaining number counter provided in the game RAM 104.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a game state command indicating a game state after the jackpot game in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 in the game state setting process.

[Special symbol standby process]
Next, the special symbol standby process will be described with reference to FIG. In the special symbol standby process (S1502), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 reservation number is "0" (S1601). If the special figure 2 pending number is "0" (YES in S1601), that is, if there is no storage of the special figure 2 related determination information acquired due to the winning of the second start port 12, the special figure It is determined whether or not the number of 1 pending is "0" (S1608). And, if the special figure 1 pending number is also "0" (YES in S1608), that is, if there is no storage of the special figure 1 related determination information acquired due to the winning of the first start port 11, It is determined whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON (S1618). Here, if the customer waiting flag is ON (YES at S1618), the special symbol waiting process is finished, and if the customer waiting flag is not ON (NO at S1618), the customer waiting command is set in the output buffer (S1619). , turns on the customer waiting flag (S1620), and ends the special symbol standby process.

Also, if the special figure 2 reservation number is "0" but the special figure 1 reservation number is not "0" (YES in S1601 and NO in S1608), that is, there is no special figure 2 related determination information, but the first start When there is one or more storage of special figure 1 related determination information acquired due to winning to mouth 11, special figure 1 determination processing (S1609) and special figure 1 variation pattern determination processing (S1610) are performed.

In the special figure 1 determination process (S1609), the special symbol random number stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a is read out first, and based on the jackpot determination table associated with the game state. Then, it is determined whether it is a big hit or a loss (big hit determination).

Here, if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the jackpot pattern type random number is read out and the jackpot pattern type is determined based on the first jackpot pattern type determination table (jackpot pattern type determination). Then, the jackpot pattern data representing the jackpot pattern type is set in a special buffer provided in the game RAM 104, and the pattern designation command indicating the jackpot pattern type is set in the output buffer provided in the game RAM 104.例文帳に追加

Also, if the result of the big hit determination is "losing", the losing design data representing the losing is set in the special figure buffer, and the design designation command representing the losing is set in the output buffer.

Next, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process (S1610) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the current non-time saving state (S1651). If it is a non-time-saving state (YES in S1651), select the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for non-time-saving state (S1652), then proceed to step S1654, If it is not a non-time-saving state (NO in S1651), time-saving After selecting the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the state (S1653), the process proceeds to step S1654.

In step S1654, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the big win determination result is "big win". If it is not a big hit (NO in S1654), the process proceeds to step S1655, and if it is a big hit (YES in S1654), the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653 After selecting the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table (S1659), the process proceeds to step S1660.

In step S1655, the game control microcomputer 101 performs reach determination. In the reach determination, the reach random number is read, and the reach random number is compared with the reach determination table corresponding to the current game state (non-time saving state/time saving state) to determine whether there is reach or not.

The game control microcomputer 101 then determines whether or not the result of reach determination in step S1655 is "with reach" (S1656). If there is a reach (YES in S1656), select the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for loss with reach from the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653 (S1658) Then proceed to step S1660, if there is no reach (NO in S1656), check the current special figure 1 pending number, step S1652 or step S1653 in either special figure 1 variation pattern determination table From select the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for reach no loss according to the number of special figure 1 reservations (S1657) and then proceed to step S1660.

The game control microcomputer 101, in step S1660, reads out the special figure variation pattern random number, and compares the special figure variation pattern random number to the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table selected in any of steps S1657 to S1659, Perform special figure 1 variation pattern determination to determine the special figure 1 variation pattern. Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the special figure 1 variation start command indicating the determined special figure 1 variation pattern to the output buffer (S1661), and special figure variation according to the determined special figure 1 variation pattern Time is set to the special action timer (S1662), the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process is terminated, and the process is returned to the special symbol standby process.

It should be noted that the special action timer is updated by 4 ms in other processes in the game control side timer interrupt process. In addition, the special figure 1 variation start command to be set includes information on the type of special symbol (that it is special figure 1) and the special figure variation pattern determination performed in the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process (S1610) Contains information on the results (information on the special figure fluctuation pattern, including information on the presence or absence of reach and special figure fluctuation time).

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 causes the special figure 1 indicator 81a to start the variation display of the special figure 1 based on the special figure variation time corresponding to the special figure 1 variation pattern determined in step S1610 (S1611). .

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 shifts one storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a to the side where it is read from the current position, and special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a To clear the storage area (storage area farthest from the side to be read) corresponding to the first reservation in (S1612). In this way, the special figure 1 reservation is digested in the order in which it was reserved.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 subtracts "1" from the special figure 1 reserved number counter (S1613), and changes the special figure 1 reserved number indicated by the special figure 1 reserved indicator 83a by decreasing it by "1" ( S1614), and changes the special action status to "2" (S1615).

The game control microcomputer 101 subsequently determines whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON (S1616), and if it is ON (YES in S1616), the customer waiting flag is turned OFF (S1617), and special symbol standby processing is performed. If it is not ON (NO in S1616), the special symbol standby process is finished without executing step S1617.

Also, if the special figure 2 reservation number is not "0" in step S1601 (NO in S1601), that is, the storage of special figure 2 related determination information acquired due to the winning of the second start port 12 is one or more If there is, special figure 2 determination processing (S1602) and special figure 2 variation pattern determination processing (S1603) are performed. Special figure 2 determination processing (S1602) and special figure 2 variation pattern determination processing (S1603) are basically the same processing content as special figure 1 determination processing (S1609) and special figure 1 variation pattern determination processing (S1610) .

Special figure 2 determination processing (S1602), except that the table used in the jackpot determination is the second jackpot determination table, and the table used in the jackpot symbol type determination is the second jackpot symbol type determination table. Since it is the same processing as the special figure 1 determination processing (S1609), the description is omitted. Also, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process (S1603) is basically the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process ( Since this is the same processing as in S1610), the description is omitted.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 causes the special figure 2 indicator 81b to start the variation display of the special figure 2 based on the special figure variation time corresponding to the special figure variation pattern determined in step S1603 (S1604).

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 shifts one storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b to the side where it is read from the current position, and special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b To clear the storage area (storage area farthest from the side to be read) corresponding to the 4th reservation in (S1605). In this way, the special figure 2 reservations are digested in the order they were reserved.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 subtracts "1" from the special figure 2 reserved number counter (S1606), and changes the special figure 2 reserved number indicated by the special figure 2 reserved indicator 83b by decreasing "1" (S1607 ), change the special action status to "2" (S1615), and proceed to step S1616.

In the basic embodiment as described above, the variable display of special symbols based on the special figure 1 reservation is performed only when the special figure 2 reservation is "0" (YES in S1601). That is, the digestion of Toku-zu 2 pending is executed with priority over the digestion of Toku-zu 1 pending. And in the basic embodiment, the lottery based on the special figure 2 reservation makes it easier for the player to win a big winning pattern that is more profitable than the lottery based on the special figure 1 reservation. In addition, the digestion of the special figure 1 reservation may be executed with priority over the digestion of the special figure 2 reservation. In addition, the digestion of the special figure 1 reservation and the digestion of the special figure 2 reservation may be performed in the order in which the reservation occurred regardless of the type of special figure.

[Special symbol variation processing]
Next, the special symbol variation processing will be described with reference to FIG. In the special symbol variation process, the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not to end the variation display of the special symbols, that is, the special symbol variation time set in the special operation timer in step S1603 or step S1610 has passed (special It is determined whether or not the operation counter=0) (S1701). If the special symbol variation display is not terminated (NO in S1701), the special symbol variation processing is terminated, and if the special symbol variation display is terminated (YES in S1701), the special symbol variable display is performed on the special symbol display device 81. is terminated, and a special symbol corresponding to the symbol data (big hit symbol data or losing special symbol data) set in the special symbol buffer at step S1602 or step S1609 is stopped and displayed (S1702).

Subsequently, a preset special figure determination time (for example, 0.8 seconds) is set in the special operation timer (S1703), and a special figure fluctuation stop command indicating that the special symbol fluctuation display is finished is output to the buffer. (S1704), the special operation status is changed to "3" (S1705), and the special symbol variation process is terminated.

[Special symbol confirmation process]
Next, the special symbol determination process will be described with reference to FIG. The game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not to end the stop display of the special symbols in the special symbol determination process (S1504), that is, the special symbol determination time set in the special operation timer in step S1703 has elapsed (special It is determined whether or not operation counter=0) (S1751). If the special symbol stop display is not terminated (NO in S1751), the special symbol determination process is terminated, and if the special symbol stop display is terminated (YES in S1751), the current normal probability state (high probability flag is OFF) (S1752).

If the game control microcomputer 101 is not currently in the normal probability state (NO in S1752), it proceeds to step S1757, and if it is in the normal probability state (YES in S1752), it is in the time saving state (the time saving flag is ON). It is determined whether or not (S1753). If the game control microcomputer 101 is not in the time saving state (NO in S1753), it proceeds to step S1757. "1" is subtracted from the value of the time saving remaining number counter that measures the number of times (time saving remaining number of times) (S1754), and it is determined whether the value of the time saving remaining number counter is "0" (S1755). If the value of the time saving remaining number counter (time saving remaining number of times) is not "0" (NO in S1755), proceed to step S1757. YES), it is made to shift from a time saving state to a non-time saving state (a time saving flag is turned OFF) (S1756), and it progresses to step S1757.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 confirms the current game state, sets a game state command indicating the game state in the output buffer (S1757), and determines whether or not the special symbol that is currently stopped and displayed is a jackpot symbol. (S1758). If it is not a jackpot pattern (NO in S1758), the special action status is changed to "1" (S1762), the special pattern determination process is finished, and if it is a jackpot pattern (YES in S1758), the gaming state is reset ( The normal game state is set.Specifically, the high probability flag and the time saving flag are turned off, and the values of the high probability remaining number counter and the time saving remaining number counter are set to "0" (S1759).

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 performs a jackpot game preparation process (S1760), changes the special action status to "4" (S1761), and ends the special symbol determination process. The game control microcomputer 101 sets a jackpot game control table corresponding to the jackpot symbol type in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104 in the jackpot game preparation process. In addition, a jackpot opening flag indicating that the opening corresponding to the stopped jackpot pattern is in progress is turned on in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104, and a predetermined opening time (jackpot game starts) is set according to the type of the jackpot pattern. set the time from when the player is done to the start of one round) in the special action timer. Furthermore, according to the type of the jackpot pattern, an opening command indicating the type of the jackpot pattern is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 . The opening command corresponding to the type of the jackpot symbol indicates that the jackpot game (opening of the jackpot game) corresponding to the type of the stop-displayed jackpot symbol is started.

6. Control of production by production control board 120 [Production control main processing]
Next, the control of the effect by the effect control board 120 will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 43 to 47. FIG. It should be noted that the flowchart for controlling the effects described below is an example. A plurality of processes in the flowchart can be executed in parallel or changed in execution order as appropriate within a range in which the contents of the processes are not inconsistent.

Also, counters, timers, flags, buffers, etc. appearing in the description of the control of the effect by the effect control board 120 below are provided in the RAM 124 for effect. The performance control microcomputer 121 provided in the performance control board 120 reads out and executes the sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. 43 from the performance ROM 123 when the pachinko game machine PY is powered on.

As shown in the figure, in the effect control main process, first, power-on processing corresponding to power-on is performed (S4001). In the power-on process, for example, settings of the performance CPU 122, settings of SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time), etc. are performed.

Next, interrupts are prohibited (S4002), and random number seed update processing is executed (S4003). In the random number seed update process (S4003), the values of various effect determination random number counters for making determinations regarding various effects are updated. It should be noted that the random numbers for effect determination include various random numbers for determining the contents of effects such as random numbers for stop symbol pattern determination and special figure variation effect pattern determination random numbers, which will be described later.

As an example of a method for updating the determination random number counter for various effects, the same method as the random number update process performed by the game control board 100 can be used. Instead of adding 1 to the random value at the time of updating, it is also possible to add 2 at a time. This also applies to the random number update process performed by the game control board 100 described above.

When the random number seed update process ends, command transmission process is executed (S4004). In the command transmission process, various commands stored in the output buffer in the production RAM 124 of the production control board 120 (for example, a special figure fluctuation production start command, a customer waiting start command, an opening production start command, a round production start, which will be described later) command, ending effect start command, etc.) to the image control board 140.

The image control board 140 that has received the command displays an image on the display section 50a according to the received command (performs various effects based on the image). In addition to the various effects performed by the image control board 140, the effect control board 120 outputs sound from the speaker 52 via the sound control circuit 161 (executes various sound effects), and the sub-drive board. Via 162, the frame lamp 53 is lit (executing various effects by light emission), and the board movable body 55k is operated (executing various effects by action). In addition, various productions include a special figure fluctuation production, a jackpot game production (big hit opening production, round production, jackpot ending production), a customer waiting production, an operation production, and a look-ahead production.

The effect control microcomputer 121 subsequently permits an interrupt (S4005). Thereafter, steps S4002 to S4005 are looped. While interrupts are enabled, reception interrupt processing (S4010), 1 ms timer interrupt processing (S4011), and 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4012) can be executed. The 1 ms timer interrupt processing (S4011) and the 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4012) will be described later.

The reception interrupt process (S4010) is executed each time a strobe signal, that is, various commands sent from the game control board 100 is input to the external INT input section of the effect control microcomputer 121. In the reception interrupt process (S4010), the effect control microcomputer 121 stores various commands transmitted and received by the output process (S101) of the game control board 100 in the receive buffer of the effect RAM124. This reception interrupt process is executed with priority over other interrupt processes (S4011, S4012).

[1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, 1 ms timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. The 1ms timer interrupt process (S4011) is executed each time an interrupt pulse with a 1msec cycle is input to the effect control board 120. The effect control microcomputer 121 first performs input processing (S4101) in the 1 ms timer interrupt processing (S4011). In the input process, the effect control microcomputer 121 creates the first effect button switch data based on the detection signal from the first effect button sensor 40a. The effect control microcomputer 121 creates second effect button switch data based on the detection signal from the second effect button sensor 41a.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs light emission data output processing (S4102). In the light emission data output process, the effect control microcomputer 121 outputs the light emission data created in the light emission data creation process (S4203) in the 10ms timer interrupt process described later in order to cause the frame lamp 53 to emit light at a timing suitable for the image effect. is output to the sub-drive board 162 . That is, the effect control microcomputer 121 causes the frame lamp 53 to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode according to the light emission data.

Next, the production control microcomputer 121 performs mobile device control processing (S4103). In the movable device control process, the effect control microcomputer 121 creates or outputs drive data (data for driving the movable board 55k) in order to drive the movable board 55k at a predetermined timing. That is, the effect control microcomputer 121 drives the board movable body 55k in a predetermined operation mode according to the drive data.

Next, the production control microcomputer 121 performs timer update processing (S4104). In the timer update process, in order to manage and control the time relating to various predetermined effects, various timers provided in the effect RAM 124 to be described later are updated. In this process, the timer provided in the effect RAM 124 is updated by 1 msec.

Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs watchdog timer processing for resetting the watchdog timer (S4105), and ends the 1ms timer interrupt processing.

[10 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 10ms timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. The 10ms timer interrupt process (S4012) is executed each time an interrupt pulse with a 10msec cycle is input to the effect control board 120. The effect control microcomputer 121, in the 10 ms timer interrupt process, first performs a received command analysis process for analyzing the command stored in the receive buffer at step S4010 (S4201). The received command analysis processing will be described in detail in the basic embodiment described later.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs voice control processing (S4202). In the audio control process, based on the effect content indicated by the special figure fluctuation effect data set in the effect RAM 124, etc., the audio data (data for controlling the output of the sound from the speaker 52) is created and sent to the audio control circuit 161. is output.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs light emission data creation processing (S4203). In the light emission data creation process, the light emission data is created based on the effect content indicated by the special figure variation effect data set in the effect RAM 124 and the like.

[Receive command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 and 47. FIG. Production control microcomputer 121, in the received command analysis process, first, from the game control board 100 start winning command (first starting winning command or second starting winning command) received or not, in other words, received starting winning command It is determined whether or not the data is stored in the buffer (S4301). If the effect control microcomputer 121 has received the start winning command (YES at S4301), the process proceeds to step S4302.

In step S4302, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs start winning process in response to the game ball winning the first start hole 11 or the second start hole 12. FIG. In the start winning process, the received starting winning command is stored in the starting winning command reserve storage unit 125 in the RAM 124 for performance. Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the stored start winning command and determines whether or not to execute a look-ahead effect indicating the degree of expectation for a big hit. The look-ahead effect includes, in addition to the pending notice of displaying the pending icon in a special mode, a continuous notice effect performed over a plurality of consecutive variable displays of special symbols. When it is determined to execute these look-ahead effects, a look-ahead effect start command for executing the determined effect is set in the output buffer of the RAM 124 for effect.

When the pre-reading effect start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 outputs a predetermined effect from the image ROM 142. The image is read out, and the display section 50a of the image display device 50 performs a look-ahead effect using the image. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs voice control according to the content of the prefetch effect indicated by the prefetch effect start command transmitted to the image control board 140 while the image control board 140 is performing the prefetch effect. A sound is output from the speaker 52 via the circuit 161 (performs the prefetch effect by the sound), and the frame lamp 53 is emitted via the sub-drive board 162 (performs the prefetch effect by light emission), and the board movable body It is possible to activate 55k (perform a look-ahead effect by action).

In step S4303, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the design designation command is received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the design designation command is stored in the reception buffer. If the design designation command is not received (NO at S4303), the effect control microcomputer 121 proceeds to step S4305. is stored in the pattern designation command storage unit 126 (S4304).

In step S4305, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the special figure fluctuation start command is received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the special figure fluctuation start command is stored in the reception buffer. If the special figure fluctuation start command is not received (NO in S4305), while proceeding to step S4307, if the special figure fluctuation start command is received (YES in S4305), the production contents of the special figure fluctuation production are determined. , Special figure fluctuation production start processing (S4306) for starting the special figure fluctuation production is performed.

The production control microcomputer 121 first stores a special figure fluctuation start command in the special figure fluctuation start command storage unit 127 in the production RAM 124 in the special figure fluctuation production start processing. Next, based on the contents of the stop special figure indicated by the pattern designation command already stored in step S4304 (type of jackpot pattern, loss special figure) and the special figure variation pattern indicated by the special figure variation start command, the effect symbol EZ1 to be stopped and displayed to EZ3, and the stop symbol pattern determination table for determining the stop symbol to determine the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3. A plurality of stop symbol pattern determination tables are provided in association with special figures and special figure variation patterns. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects one stop symbol pattern determination table associated with the stop special figure and the special figure variation pattern. In each stop design pattern determination table, a plurality of production designs EZ1 to EZ3 and small designs KZ1 to KZ3 are provided with random number values for stop design pattern determination (stop design pattern determination) so as to have a predetermined allocation rate (%). value) are distributed. Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the stop symbol pattern determination random number counter as the stop symbol pattern determination random number, and performs stop symbol pattern determination based on the acquired stop symbol pattern determination random number.

The performance control microcomputer 121 collates the acquired stop symbol pattern determination random number with the selected stop symbol pattern table in the stop symbol pattern determination, and determines the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 to be stopped and displayed. Then, data representing the determined performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are set in a predetermined area of the RAM 124 for performance. For example, a combination of performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is selected so that the special figure variation pattern is a reach-less loss variation, so-called "separate eyes". In addition, if the special figure fluctuation pattern is reach and loss fluctuation, the left production pattern EZ1 and the right production pattern EZ3 are the same, and the middle production pattern EZ2 is different from them. A KZ3 combination is selected. Furthermore, if the special figure variation pattern is a big hit variation, a combination of the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 and the small patterns KZ1 to KZ3 is selected so that it becomes a so-called "double eye" according to the production mode and the type of the big hit pattern. .

Next, the production control microcomputer 121 selects a special figure fluctuation production pattern in which the production contents of the special figure fluctuation production are associated based on the special figure fluctuation pattern indicated by the staying production mode and the special figure fluctuation start command. A special figure variation performance pattern determination table for performing special figure variation performance pattern determination to be determined is selected. A plurality of special figure fluctuation effect pattern determination tables are provided in association with the effect mode and the special figure fluctuation pattern. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 121 selects one special figure fluctuation production pattern determination table associated with the special figure fluctuation pattern. In each special figure fluctuation production pattern determination table, one or more special figure fluctuation production pattern has a random number value for special figure fluctuation production pattern judgment (special figure fluctuation production pattern judgment value) are distributed. Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the special figure fluctuation production pattern determination random number counter as a special figure fluctuation production pattern judgment random number, and special figure based on the acquired special figure fluctuation production pattern judgment random number. Variation performance pattern determination is performed.

In the special figure fluctuation production pattern determination, the production control microcomputer 121 collates the acquired special figure fluctuation production pattern determination random number with the selected special figure fluctuation production pattern table, determines the special figure fluctuation production pattern, and determines. Data representing the special figure fluctuation production pattern (special figure fluctuation production pattern data) is set in a predetermined area of the production RAM 124, and a special figure fluctuation production start command indicating the special figure fluctuation production pattern is stored in the output buffer of the production RAM 124. set.

When the special figure variation effect start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 receives a predetermined amount from the image ROM 142. The effect image is read out, and the display unit 50a of the image display device 50 performs a special figure variation effect by the image.

In addition, the special figure fluctuation production start command includes information regarding the production flow associated with the special figure fluctuation pattern indicated by the special figure fluctuation start command. In addition, in addition to the special figure fluctuation production by the image performed by the image display device 50, the special figure fluctuation production start command includes the special figure fluctuation production by the sound output from the speaker 52, the special figure by the light emission performed by the frame lamp 53 The contents of the figure fluctuation production and the contents of the special figure fluctuation production by the action performed by the board movable body 55k are included.

In addition, the production control microcomputer 121, while the special figure fluctuation production by the image performed by the image control board 140 is being performed, the special figure fluctuation production contents indicated by the special figure fluctuation production start command transmitted to the image control board 140 In response, output the sound from the speaker 52 through the voice control circuit 161 (execute the special figure fluctuation effect by the sound), and emit the frame lamp 53 through the sub-drive board 162 (special figure by light emission (performs the variation performance), and operates the board movable body 55k (performs the special figure variation performance by the action).

In step S4307, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the special figure fluctuation stop command is received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the special figure fluctuation stop command is stored in the reception buffer. Production control microcomputer 121, if the special figure fluctuation stop command is not received (NO in S4307), while proceeding to step S4309, if the special figure fluctuation stop command is received (YES in S4307), special figure fluctuation A special figure fluctuation production end process (S4308) for ending the production (stopping the variable display of the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 and the small patterns KZ1 to KZ3 and performing stop display) is performed.

The production control microcomputer 121 analyzes the special figure fluctuation stop command in the special figure fluctuation production end processing, and appropriately ends the special figure fluctuation production based on the analysis result (production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 and small pattern KZ1 To stop the fluctuation display of ~KZ3) to set the special figure fluctuation production end command to the output buffer of the production RAM124. When the image control board 140 receives the special figure variation effect end command, it ends the special figure variation effect being executed (stops the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 being changed).

In step S4309, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the game state command is received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the game state command is stored in the reception buffer. If the game state command is not received (NO in S4309), the effect control microcomputer 121 proceeds to step S4311, and if the game state command is received (YES in S4309), the game state command is analyzed. , to specify the game state represented by the game state command, and perform a game state setting process for setting the game state (S4310).

The effect control microcomputer 121 sets a game state flag corresponding to the game state indicated by the game state command in the game state flag area of the effect RAM 124 in the game state setting process. For example, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the game state flag “00H” in the game state flag area of the effect RAM 124 if the game state indicated by the game state command is the normal game state. Also, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the game state flag “01H” in the game state flag area of the effect RAM 124 if the game state indicated by the game state command is the high probability high base game state. Further, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the game state flag “02H” in the game state flag area of the effect RAM 124 if the game state indicated by the game state command is the low probability high base game state.

In step S4311, the production control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the customer waiting command is received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the customer waiting command is stored in the reception buffer. If the production control microcomputer 121 has not received the customer waiting command (NO at S4311), it proceeds to step S4313, and if it has received the customer waiting command (YES at S4311), the customer waiting production standby process is performed. (S4312), the received command analysis process ends.

In the customer waiting effect waiting process, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the waiting time (customer waiting effect waiting time: for example, 20 seconds) from the stop display of the effect pattern to the start of the customer waiting effect as the customer waiting effect. Set a timer. Note that the effect control microcomputer 121 can determine whether or not this waiting time has passed. output buffer.

In step S4313, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the opening command is received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the opening command is stored in the reception buffer. If the effect control microcomputer 121 has not received the opening command (NO in S4313), while proceeding to step S4315, if the opening command has been received (YES in S4313), the jackpot associated with the start of the opening of the jackpot game Opening effect start processing is performed (S4314).

The performance control microcomputer 121 analyzes the opening command in the jackpot opening performance start processing, and determines whether or not to execute the jackpot opening performance corresponding to the opening of the jackpot game to be executed based on the analysis result. If it is to be executed, the performance content of the jackpot opening performance (jackpot opening performance pattern) is selected, and a jackpot opening performance start command for starting the jackpot opening performance in the selected jackpot opening performance pattern is output from the performance RAM 124. set in the buffer.

In step S4315, the production control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the round number designation command is received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the round number designation command is stored in the reception buffer. If the round number designation command is not received (NO in S4315), while proceeding to step S4317, if the round number designation command is received (YES in S4315), the round production start processing is performed along with the start of the round game. (S4316).

In the round effect start processing, the effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the round number designation command, determines whether or not to execute the round effect corresponding to the round game to be started from now on, and executes the round effect if it is to be executed. (round performance pattern) is selected, and a round performance start command corresponding to the selected round performance pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM 124 for performance.

In step S4317, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the ending command is received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the ending command is stored in the reception buffer. If the ending command has not been received (NO at S4317), while ending the received command analysis process, if the ending command has been received (YES at S4317), the jackpot ending effect start processing accompanying the start of the jackpot game ending ( After performing S4318) and effect mode setting processing (S4319), the received command analysis processing ends.

The effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the ending command in the jackpot ending effect start processing, determines whether or not to execute the jackpot ending effect according to the ending of the jackpot game to be executed from now on, and executes it. The performance contents of the jackpot ending performance (jackpot ending performance pattern) are selected, and a jackpot ending performance start command corresponding to the selected jackpot ending performance pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM 124 for performance.

In addition, in the effect mode setting process, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the effect mode after the jackpot game based on the analysis result of the ending command, specifically, the jackpot pattern indicated by the ending command (the effect mode is set). control).

For example, when the jackpot pattern indicated by the jackpot ending command is the jackpot pattern A or the jackpot pattern D, the production control microcomputer 121 sets the variable probability production mode suggesting a high probability high base game state. Then, a performance mode flag indicating the variable probability performance mode is turned on in a predetermined area of the performance RAM 124, and a variable probability performance mode start command indicating setting of the variable probability performance mode is set in the output buffer of the RAM 124 for performance. When the probability variable effect mode start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 is at the timing when the ending ends. , the background image G120 for probability variation is displayed as the background image, and BGM for probability variation is output as BGM.

When the jackpot pattern indicated by the jackpot ending command is jackpot pattern B, jackpot pattern C, or jackpot pattern E, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects either a high-probability high-base game state or a low-probability high-base game state. Set a time-saving production mode that is difficult to determine or impossible to determine. Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 turns ON the effect mode flag indicating the time saving effect mode in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124, and outputs a time saving effect mode start command indicating that the time saving effect mode is set to the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. set to When the time-saving production mode start command set in the output buffer of the production RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 is at the timing when the ending ends. , the time saving background image G130 is displayed as the background image, and the time saving BGM is output as the BGM.

<First Embodiment>
Next, a first embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the basic embodiment according to the present invention described above. In the following, as the first embodiment, mainly the points different from the basic embodiment will be described. In addition, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as in the basic embodiment, or similarly corresponding configurations.

In the pachinko machine PY1 of the first embodiment, a predetermined number (for example, 10,000) of game balls, which are game media, are sealed inside and circulated inside without being discharged to the outside. It consists of an enclosed game machine in which the game ball cannot be touched. In the pachinko machine PY1, regardless of whether the player has won (passed through) various prize-winning ports 10, 11, 12, and 14 from which game balls can be acquired as prize balls, or passed through the out port 19 without winning a prize, The game balls that are shot, enter the game area 6, and flow down in the game area 6 are recovered, and by shooting the recovered game balls again, the game is played by cyclically using the internal game balls. .

In the following, game balls that win (pass through) the various prize-winning ports 10, 11, 12, and 14 and are discharged to the outside of the game area 6 are referred to as "safe balls". A game ball that passes through the out port 19 and is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 is sometimes called an "out ball". In addition, the safe ball and the out ball are sometimes collectively referred to as the "eject ball".

Furthermore, as will be described later, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1, game balls are set (supplied) at a predetermined shooting position and then shot toward the game area 6 by the shooting device 72. It may return toward the predetermined launch position without reaching the target. In this case, the game ball returning toward the predetermined shooting position does not return to the predetermined shooting position as it is, but is recovered as a foul ball from a predetermined foul ball recovery port formed in the shooting area 7.例文帳に追加Then, in the pachinko game machine PY1, the foul balls are shot again after being collected, like the sale balls and the out balls (discharge balls). That is, the safe balls, the out balls, and the foul balls constitute game balls that are cyclically used inside the pachinko gaming machine PY1.

Further, in the first embodiment, the game balls enclosed in the pachinko game machine PY1 are all stainless steel game balls that do not stick to magnets. This stainless steel game ball contains less iron than the steel game ball that sticks to a magnet, which is commonly used in the past. This is to prevent fraudulent use of magnets to guide game balls from the outside of the transparent plate 23t.

FIG. 48 is a front view schematically showing the pachinko game machine PY1. As shown in FIG. 48, a card unit CU is installed to the left of the pachinko gaming machine PY1. A front face of the card unit CU is provided with a card insertion slot CUa1 into which an IC card as a recording medium can be inserted and removed, and a bill insertion slot CUa2 into which bills can be inserted. The card unit CU reads and rewrites value information, such as the credit balance and the number of balls held by the IC card, from the IC card inserted into the card insertion slot CUa1. can communicate with

Further, since the pachinko game machine PY1 is configured as an enclosed game machine, the structure of the front door 23 is greatly different from that of the basic embodiment.

A unit display device 300 capable of performing an operation for starting a game is arranged at the front lower end portion of the front door 23 . The unit display device 300 is composed of a touch panel having a liquid crystal display, and displays a button (lending button) for lending a game ball and a button (return button) for returning a game ball (not shown).

Note that the unit display device 300 is electrically connected to the card unit CU. When a lending button or a returning button displayed on the unit display device 300 is operated, the card unit CU transmits to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 that the game ball is to be lent or the game ball is to be returned.

Further, a protruding base 34 protruding forward is provided directly above the unit display device 300 in the front door 23 . Since the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is an enclosed gaming machine, the protruding platform 34 is not open like the upper plate 34 of the pachinko gaming machine PY according to the basic embodiment, but is closed, allowing the player to has a structure that cannot contact the game ball. In addition, in front of the protruding base 34, a number of held balls display device 301 for displaying the number of held balls, which will be described later, is arranged. A first effect button 40k is arranged.

The second effect button 41k (second effect button device 41) mounted on the pachinko game machine PY of the basic embodiment is not mounted on the pachinko game machine PY1. Further, the front door 23 is provided with a speaker 52 and a frame lamp 53, which are configured differently from those of the basic embodiment. The frame lamps 53 include an upper frame lamp 53U arranged on the upper side and a lower frame lamp 53D arranged on the lower side.

A lock 302 for holding and releasing the closed state of the front door 23 (locking and unlocking the front door 23) is provided at the right end of the pachinko game machine PY1. The lock 302 has a cylindrical structure, and can be unlocked and locked with a dedicated key possessed by the amusement arcade.

Although detailed description is omitted, the pachinko game machine PY1 includes a polishing device 303 and a lifting device 304 for circulating game balls inside. The polishing device 303 and the lifting device 304 are arranged below the inner frame 22 . The discharged balls discharged outside the game area 6 after passing through the general winning opening 10, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, the big winning opening 14, and the out opening 19 are None).

The recovery path is formed in a straight line or a gently curved shape so that even when a plurality of game balls flow in at the same time, they are sorted out and stably flow down one by one in order at a constant speed. The recovery passage is connected to a storage passage (not shown) in which the game balls circulating therein are finally stored, and the game balls recovered in the recovery passage subsequently flow into the storage passage. Game balls collected as foul balls also flow into the storage passage. The game balls (discharged balls and foul balls) that have flowed into the storage passage are ground by the grinding device 303 . The polished game ball is finally set (fed) to a predetermined firing position where it is fired into the launcher 72 by the lifting device 304 .

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko game machine PY1 will be described. The pachinko game machine PY1 does not have the payout control board 170 in the basic embodiment, but does have a frame control board 180 . The frame control board 180 mainly performs control related to game balls such as shooting, grinding, and lifting of game balls, and also controls and manages the number of held balls (game balls), which will be described later. FIG. 49 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the game control board 100 and the frame control board 180. As shown in FIG. 49, devices such as various display devices and various sensors connected to the game control board 100 are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 49, the frame control board 180 is connected to a power board 190 and receives power from the power board 190 . Also, the frame control board 180 is connected to the game control board 100 so as to be capable of two-way communication. Therefore, signals (data/information) can be transmitted from the game control board 100 to the frame control board 180, and signals (data/information) can be transmitted from the frame control board 180 to the game control board 100. . Furthermore, the frame control board 180 is connected to the card unit CU so as to be able to communicate bidirectionally. Therefore, signals (data/information) can be transmitted from the card unit CU to the frame control board 180, and signals (data/information) can be transmitted from the frame control board 180 to the card unit CU.

When the lend-ball button displayed on the unit display device 300 is operated, the unit display device 300 outputs a signal (loan-ball operation detection signal) indicating that the operation of the lend-ball button has been detected to the card unit CU. . When the card unit CU receives the ball lending operation detection signal, the card unit CU outputs to the frame control board 180 a signal (ball lending request signal) indicating a request for lending a ball.

When the return button displayed on the unit display device 300 is operated, the unit display device 300 outputs a signal (return operation detection signal) indicating that the operation of the return button has been detected to the card unit CU. When the return operation detection signal is input, the card unit CU outputs a signal indicating a request for return (return request signal) to the frame control board 180 .

In addition, the card unit CU appropriately updates the credit balance recorded in the IC card according to the operation of the ball lending button or return button. If the credit balance recorded in the IC card is less than the credit corresponding to one operation of the ball lending button, the card unit CU operates the ball lending button. It is configured not to output the operation detection signal to the frame control board 180 .

Also, the frame control board 180 is connected to the firing device 72, but not through the firing control circuit 175 as in the basic embodiment. Although the details will be described later, the frame control board 180 directly controls the shooting of game balls by the shooting device 72 . Further, a polishing device 303 and a lifting device 304 are connected to the frame control board 180 . A description of the polishing of the game ball by the polishing device 303 and the control of the lifting of the game ball by the lifting device 304 will be omitted. Grinding of game balls and lifting of game balls are executed.

Furthermore, various sensors are connected to the frame control board 180 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Therefore, signals output from various sensors are input to the frame control board 180 . Various sensors connected to the frame control board 180 include an unlock detection sensor 302a, a door open detection sensor 23a, a discharged ball detection sensor 310a, a launched ball detection sensor 311a, and a foul ball detection sensor 312a. .

The unlock detection sensor 302a can detect that the lock 302 is unlocked, and when it detects that the lock 302 is unlocked, it sends a signal (unlock detection signal) indicating that the lock 302 is unlocked to the frame control board. Output to 180. The door open detection sensor 23a can detect that the front door 23 is open, and when it detects that the front door 23 is open, it sends a signal (door open detection signal) indicating that the front door 23 is open to the frame control board 180. output to

The discharged ball detection sensor 310a detects game balls discharged outside the game area 6 through the general winning port 10, the first starting port 11, the second starting port 12, the big winning port 14, and the out port 19 ( It is provided in a collection passage for collectively collecting discharged balls). The ejected ball detection sensor 310 a is capable of detecting an ejected ball, and upon detecting an ejected ball, outputs to the frame control board 180 a signal (ejected ball detection signal) indicating that an ejected ball has occurred. The safe ball is a game ball that passes through the general winning hole 10, the first starting hole 11, the second starting hole 12, and the big winning hole 14 and is discharged to the outside of the game area 6, and the out ball is Since it is a game ball discharged outside the game area 6 through the out port 19, the discharged ball is a combination of the safe ball and the out ball, and basically enters the game area 6. matches the game ball

The shot ball detection sensor 311a can detect a game ball (shot ball) that has been shot from a predetermined shooting position toward the game area 6 and is moving in the shooting area 7 toward the game area 6. When detected, it outputs a signal indicating that a shot ball has been generated (shot ball detection signal) to the frame control board 180 . The shot ball detection sensor 311a is configured so as not to detect game balls that have been shot but cannot reach the game area 6 and move (reverse flow) toward a predetermined shooting position.

The foul ball detection sensor 312a can detect a game ball (foul ball) that has been shot but cannot reach the game area 6 and has moved (reverse flow) toward a predetermined shooting position and has been recovered. When a ball is detected, a signal (foul ball detection signal) indicating the occurrence of a foul ball is output to the frame control board 180 . Although detailed explanation is omitted, the foul ball is collected from a foul ball collection point formed between the boundary between the game area 6 and the shooting area 7 and a predetermined shooting position where the shooting device 7 shoots the game ball. It is retrieved from the mouth (not shown). The foul ball recovery port allows the game balls shot toward the game area 6 to pass through toward the game area 6 without hindrance, and prevents the shot balls from reaching the game area 6 to reach a predetermined level. It is constructed so that the game ball that has returned to the firing position can be recovered. The foul ball detection sensor 312a is provided at the foul ball recovery port.

Discharged ball detection sensor 310a, launched ball detection sensor 311a, foul ball detection sensor 312a, general winning opening sensor 10a, first starting opening sensor 11a, second starting opening sensor 12a, gate sensor 13a, and big winning opening The sensor 14a is configured to be able to detect a stainless steel game ball (non-magnetic game ball) that does not stick to a magnet (non-magnetic, non-magnetic). In addition, since it is configured to be able to detect stainless steel game balls that do not stick to magnets, the discharge ball detection sensor 310a, the launched ball detection sensor 311a, the foul ball detection sensor 312a, the general winning hole sensor 10a, and the first The starting opening sensor 11a, the second starting opening sensor 12a, the gate sensor 13a, and the big winning opening sensor 14a have a higher iron content than stainless steel game balls that do not stick to magnets, so they stick to magnets (have magnetism). Steel game balls (magnetic material game balls) are also detected.

In addition, the frame control board 180 is connected to the number-of-balls display device 301 so as to be capable of two-way communication. Therefore, a signal (data/information) can be transmitted from the frame control board 180 to the number-of-balls display device 301, and a signal (data/information) can be transmitted from the number-of-balls display device 301 to the frame control board 180. is possible.

The number-of-balls display device 301 consists of six 7-segment LEDs arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. The number of held balls display button 301k for displaying the number of held balls on the display 301b, the display button detection sensor 301a for detecting the operation of the number of held balls display button 301k, and the number of held balls BU for storing the number of held balls. A section 301d is provided. When the pitch display button 301k is operated, the display button detection sensor 301a sends a signal (display button detection signal) indicating that the pitch display button 301k has been operated to the frame control board 180. Output.

Here, the number of balls held will be explained. The number of balls in possession is the number of game balls that a player can use in a game. As described above, since the pachinko game machine PY1 is an enclosed game machine, game balls are not physically paid out to the player. Therefore, the pachinko game machine PY1 electronically controls and manages the number of balls held. When the ball lending button displayed on the unit display device 300 is operated, the number of held balls is added by the number of game balls associated with the ball lending button operation. The number of game balls associated with this ball lending button operation can be set appropriately, but in the first embodiment, it is assumed to be set to 250, for example.

Furthermore, when a game ball wins (a safe ball is generated), the number of balls in possession is added by the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning hole. This number can also be set as appropriate. It is assumed that the number is set to 15. Also, the number of held balls is decremented by one each time a game ball is shot. On the other hand, the number of held balls is incremented by one each time a game ball is recovered from the foul ball recovery port and a foul ball is generated.

In addition, the sensors 10a, 11a, 12a, and 14a corresponding to the various winning ports output respective detection signals to the game control board 100 when detecting the winning, but the game control board 100 outputs the detection signals related to the winning. When input, prize ball processing related to various winning holes of the sensor detection process (S104) (general winning hole prize ball process (S202), second start hole prize ball process (S208), first start hole prize ball process (S215) , in the big winning opening prize ball processing (S224)), a command indicating the number of prize balls (a prize ball number designation command) is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104, and the set prize ball number designation command is processed by the game control side timer It is transmitted to the frame control board 180 in the output process (S101) of the interrupt process (S005). That is, information about the number of winning balls is transmitted from the game control board 100 to the frame control board 180 .

In addition, the frame control board 180 is mounted with a frame control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a “frame control microcomputer”) 181 that controls and manages game balls and the number of held balls according to a program. Therefore, the frame control board 180 can be positioned as a control unit that controls and manages the number of held balls, as well as the shooting of game balls and the control of predetermined matters other than shooting (grinding and transportation).

The frame control microcomputer 181 includes a frame control ROM 183 that stores programs, tables, etc. for controlling the firing of game balls and predetermined matters other than firing (grinding and transport) and controlling and managing the number of balls held; A frame control RAM 184 used as a work memory and a frame control CPU 182 for executing programs stored in a frame control ROM 183 are included.

The frame control ROM 183 stores programs for executing frame control main processing, frame control side timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later. Note that the frame control ROM 183 may be attached externally.

The frame control RAM 184 is provided with a pitch number storage unit 185 that stores data indicating the number of pitches held. As mentioned above, the number of balls held is updated by operating the ball lending button, winning prizes in the various prize-winning ports 10, 11, 12, and 14, adding according to the occurrence of foul balls, and subtracting according to the occurrence of shot balls. However, this update is performed by the frame control CPU 182 based on the ball lending request signal, prize ball designation command, foul ball detection signal, and shot ball detection signal. Then, the frame control CPU 182 updates the data indicating the number of possession balls stored in the number of possession balls storage unit 185 .

Further, the frame control RAM 184 is provided with a frame control side number of balls held BU section 186 . The frame control side ball possession number BU unit 186 is provided for backing up the data indicating the number of ball possession stored in the ball possession number storage unit 185. When updating the stored data indicating the number of held balls, the data indicating the number of held balls stored in the frame control side number of held balls BU section 186 is also updated with the same content.

In addition, the frame control side number-of-held-balls BU section 186 has a first number-of-held-balls BU area 186a, a second number-of-held-balls BU area 186b, and a third-number-of-held-balls BU area 186c. Each of the first ball-handling number BU area 186a, the second ball-handling number BU area 186b, and the third ball-handling number BU area 186c stores data indicating the number of ball-handling numbers as a backup. The power supply to the frame control board 180 is stopped in the frame control side ball-handling number BU section 186 (the first ball-handling number BU area 186a, the second ball-handling number BU area 186b, and the third ball-handling number BU area 186c). The data (the number of possession balls) stored in the frame control side possession number BU section 186 is held even when the frame control side possession number BU unit 186 is held. When updating the data indicating the number of owned balls stored in the number of owned balls storage unit 185, the frame control CPU 182 stores the data indicating the same number of owned balls in the first number of owned balls BU area 186a and the second number of owned balls. The data are overwritten (backed up) in the number of pitches BU area 186b and the third number of pitches BU area 186c.

In the following, the data indicating the number of held balls stored in the number of held balls storage unit 185 is referred to as “master data of the number of held balls”, and the number of held balls stored in the frame control side number of held balls BU unit 186 is sometimes referred to as "frame control side ball possession BU data". In addition, data indicating the number of held balls stored in the first number of held balls BU area 186a as the "frame control side number of held balls BU data" is referred to as "first frame control side number of held balls BU data". The data indicating the number of possession balls stored in the second number of possession balls BU area 186b is referred to as "second frame control side number of possession balls BU data", and the number of possession balls stored in the third number of possession balls BU area 186c. is sometimes referred to as "third frame control side number of balls held BU data".

Further, the game RAM 104 of the game control microcomputer 101 is provided with a game control side possession ball number BU section 106 for storing data indicating the number of possession balls in addition to the special figure reservation storage section 105 . Hereinafter, data indicating the number of held balls stored in the game control side number of held balls BU section 106 is referred to as "game control side number of held balls BU data", and is stored in the display device side number of held balls BU section 301d. The data indicating the number of balls held is sometimes referred to as "display device side number of balls held BU data".

7. Control of game balls and management of number of possession balls by frame control microcomputer 181 [Frame control main processing]
Next, control of game balls and control/management of the number of held balls by the frame control microcomputer 181 will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 60. FIG. It should be noted that the flowcharts for controlling game balls and controlling and managing the number of balls held, etc., described below are only examples, and multiple processes in various flowcharts may be performed as appropriate to the extent that there is no inconsistency in the content of the processes. Execution order can be changed or executed in parallel.

In addition, counters, timers, flags, buffers, etc. appearing in the control of game balls and the management of the number of held balls by the frame control microcomputer 181 described below are provided in the frame control RAM 184 . The initial value of the counter is "0", and the initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF".

When power is supplied to the frame control microcomputer 181, the frame control main processing program shown in FIG. 50 is read from the frame control ROM 183 and executed. As shown in the figure, in the frame control main process, first, power-on process (S5001) is performed. Here, the power-on process (S5001) will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing.

As shown in FIG. 51, in the power-on process (S5001), the frame control microcomputer 181 first sets access permission to the frame control RAM 184 (S5101). This enables writing and reading of information to and from the frame control RAM 184 . Subsequently, the frame control microcomputer 181 determines whether or not the power-off flag is ON (S5102). The power failure flag is a flag indicating the occurrence of power failure (that the power supply has been stopped), and is a flag that is turned ON in the power failure monitoring process described later.

If the power-off flag is not ON (NO in S5102), the frame control microcomputer 181 proceeds to step S5108 because there is a possibility that the power supply is not normally stopped. On the other hand, if the power-off flag is ON (YES in S5102), the frame control microcomputer 181 calculates the checksum (S5103) and compares it with the checksum calculated at the time of the power-off (S5104). ). Note that the checksum is the sum of the various data stored in the frame control RAM 184, which is regarded as numerical values. If the checksum values do not match (NO in S5104), the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the contents stored in the frame control RAM 184 are not normal (abnormal), and proceeds to step S5108. On the other hand, if the checksum values match (YES in S5104), the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the contents stored in the frame control RAM 184 are normal, and proceeds to step S5105.

In step S5105, the frame control microcomputer 181 sets and manages the work area of the frame control RAM 184 at the time of power restoration (start of power supply). In this setting process, the frame control microcomputer 181 reads power recovery information from the frame control ROM 183 and sets the power recovery information in the work area of the frame control RAM 184 . After that, the frame control microcomputer 181 turns off the power-off flag (S5106), and proceeds to step S5107.

In step S5108, the frame control microcomputer 181 determines whether the number of held balls (frame control side number of held balls BU data) stored in the frame control side number of held balls BU unit 186 is correct or not. Specifically, as the frame control side possession ball number BU data stored in the frame control side possession ball number BU section 186, the first frame control side possession ball number BU data (first frame control side possession ball number BU area 186a ), second frame control side possession ball number BU data (second frame control side possession ball number BU area 186b), and third frame control side possession ball number BU data There is number BU data (the number of held balls stored in the third frame control side number of held balls BU area 186c), but the frame control microcomputer 181 determines whether all the number of held balls indicated by these data are correct or incorrect. Determine whether or not they match.

If the frame control side number of balls held BU unit 186 is not normal, in other words, if the number of balls held does not match (NO in S5108), the frame control side number of balls held BU unit 186 It is determined that the stored frame control side possession ball count BU data (stored contents of the frame control side possession ball count BU unit 186) is not normal (abnormal), and the process proceeds to step S5114. On the other hand, the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the frame control side held ball number BU unit 186 is normal, in other words, if the number of held balls matches (YES in S5108), the frame control side held ball number BU unit 186 It is determined that the frame control side possession ball number BU data stored in the number BU unit 186 (stored contents of the frame control side possession ball number BU unit 186) is normal, and the process proceeds to step S5110.

In step S5110, the frame control microcomputer 181 determines the number of held balls indicated by the first frame control side number BU data, the second frame control side number BU data, and the third frame control side number BU data. The number is saved (restored) in the number-of-balls storage unit 185 as the normal value of the number of balls-held. Subsequently, in step S5111, the frame control microcomputer 181 clears the areas of the frame control RAM 184 other than the number-of-held-balls storage unit 185 and the number-of-held-balls BU unit 186 on the frame control side.

Further, in step S5112, the frame control microcomputer 181 initializes the working area of the frame control RAM 184, and in step S5113, executes frame control RAM abnormality notification to notify that the frame control RAM 184 is not normal. and proceeds to step S5007.

In the initial setting of the work area of the frame control RAM 184 in step S5112, the initial setting information read from the frame control ROM 183 is set in the work area of the frame control RAM 184. FIG. Further, the frame control microcomputer 181 uses the image display device 50 to perform frame control RAM abnormality notification. However, since the frame control board 180 and the image display device 50 are not directly connected, the frame control board 180 outputs the frame control RAM abnormality notification request signal requesting execution of the frame control RAM abnormality notification. Output to the control board 100 . When the frame control RAM abnormality notification request signal is inputted, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits a frame control RAM abnormality notification designation command for designating execution of the frame control RAM abnormality notification to the effect control board 120 .

When the effect control microcomputer 121 receives the frame control RAM abnormality notification designation command, it causes the image display device 50 to display an image indicating that the frame control RAM 184 is abnormal as the frame control RAM abnormality notification. The specific content of the image indicating that the frame control RAM 184 is abnormal can be set as appropriate. This is composed of an explanatory text "RAM for frame control is abnormal. Please call a clerk."

In addition, the frame control microcomputer 181 transmits a possession ball number data request command to the game control board 100 in step S5114. This is because the storage contents of the frame control side possession ball number BU section 186 were not normal (abnormal), so the data indicating the number of possession balls backed up in the game control board 100 (game control side possession ball number This is for confirming the number of BU data). Although the detailed description is omitted, when the game control microcomputer 101 receives the command for requesting data of the number of possession balls, a command ( Game control side holding ball number designation command) is transmitted to the frame control board 180. Processing when the game control side ball number designation command is received will be described later.

Subsequently, the frame control microcomputer 181 clears the frame control RAM 184 in step S5115, and proceeds to step S5112.

In step S5107, the frame control microcomputer 181 performs other initial settings such as setting of the frame control CPU 182, setting of SIO, PIO, and CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time). Terminate input processing.

The description returns to the frame control main process (FIG. 50). After the power-on processing, the frame control microcomputer 181 prohibits interrupts (S5002) and executes output processing (S5003). In the output process, the frame control microcomputer 181 outputs various commands and signals stored in the output buffer in the frame control RAM 184 of the frame control board 180 to the game control board 100, the card unit CU, and the number of balls held. 301, or to launcher 72.

After completing the output process (S5003), the frame control microcomputer 181 permits an interrupt (S5004). While the interrupt is enabled, it is possible to execute the frame control side timer interrupt processing (S5005). The frame control side timer interrupt processing (S5005) is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the frame control CPU 182 at a predetermined cycle (4 ms cycle in the first embodiment). That is, the frame control side timer interrupt processing (S5005) is executed at a cycle of 4 milliseconds.

[Frame control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, frame control side timer interrupt processing (S5005) will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of frame control side timer interrupt processing. As shown in FIG. 52, in the frame control side timer interrupt processing (S5005), the frame control microcomputer 181 first executes input processing (S5201). In the input process (S5201), the frame control microcomputer 181 receives various detection signals and various commands, and stores information indicated by the various detection signals and various commands in an input buffer provided in the frame control RAM 184. FIG.

The frame control microcomputer 181 executes the input process (S5201) and then the number-of-held-balls restoration process (S5202). The number-of-balls-held restoration process (S5202) is a process performed to restore the data on the number of balls-held when it is determined that the power-on process (S5001) is not normal (NO in S5109). is. The number-of-balls restoration process (S5202) will be described later.

The frame control microcomputer 181 executes the firing control process (S5203) following the number-of-balls restoration process (S5202). The shooting control process (S5203) is a process of judging whether or not the game ball can be shot, and causing the shooting device 72 to shoot the game ball if it can be shot. The firing control process (S5203) will be described later.

The frame control microcomputer 181 executes the ball number management process (S5204) following the launch control process (S5203). The number of owned balls management process (S5204) is a process for electronically controlling and managing the number of owned balls by updating the number of owned balls according to the progress of the game. The number-of-balls management process (S5204) will be described later.

The frame control microcomputer 181 executes a fraud detection process (S5205) following the number of balls in possession management process (S5204). The fraud detection process (S5205) is a process for detecting fraudulent use of iron game balls in the pachinko game machine PY1. The fraud detection process (S5205) will be described later.

The frame control microcomputer 181 executes the firing prohibition process (S5206) following the fraud detection process (S5205). The firing prohibition process (S5206) is a process for detecting whether or not the lock 302 is unlocked, and executing prohibition/releasing the firing prohibition of the game ball according to whether or not it is unlocked. The firing prohibition process (S5206) will be described later.

The frame control microcomputer 181 executes a game ball entry prevention process (S5207) following the firing prohibition process (S5206). The game ball entry prevention process (S5207) detects whether or not the front door 23 is open, and depending on whether or not it is open, executes the entry prevention of the game ball into the game area 6 and cancels the entry inhibition. This process is for The game ball entry prevention process (S5207) will be described later.

The frame control microcomputer 181 executes other processing (S5208) after the game ball entry prevention processing (S5207), and terminates the frame control side timer interrupt processing (S5005). As other processing (S5208), power-off monitoring processing when the power supply is cut off, updating of the timer provided in the frame control RAM 184, and the like are performed.

The frame control microcomputer 181 first determines whether or not a power-off signal has been input as power-off monitoring processing. The power-off signal is a signal that the power supply board 190 that monitors the power supply voltage outputs to the frame control board 180 when the power supply voltage starts to drop due to the stoppage of the power supply. When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the power-off signal has been input, it calculates a checksum based on the data stored in the frame control RAM 184 and stores it in a predetermined storage area of the frame control RAM 184. Turn ON the power off flag. Then, the frame control microcomputer 181 sets prohibition of access to the frame control RAM 184 . This makes it impossible to write or read information to or from the frame control RAM 184 . Thereafter, loop processing is performed without returning to frame control side timer interrupt processing.

In addition, the frame control microcomputer 181 appropriately updates various timers provided in the frame control RAM 184, which will be described later, by 4 msec as the timer provided in the frame control RAM 184 is updated.

Next, various processes (S5202 to S5207) in the frame control side timer interrupt process will be described.

First, the number-of-balls restoration process (S5202) will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of the number-of-balls restoration process. As shown in FIG. 53, in the number-of-handed-balls restoration process (S5202), the frame control microcomputer 181 first determines whether or not a game control-side number-of-handed-balls designation command indicating the number of owned balls is received (S5301). . As described above, the game control side number-of-held-balls designation command is the number-of-held-balls data request command sent to the game control board 100 in step S5113. This is the command to send to 180.

As will be described later, every time the number of owned balls is updated in the number of owned balls management process (S5203), the frame control microcomputer 181 provides a command indicating the updated number of owned balls (update number of owned balls) as a backup of the number of owned balls. specified command) to the game control board 100. When the game control microcomputer 101 receives the number-of-held-balls update designation command, the number of owned-balls indicated by the command is used as the number of-held-balls BU data for the game-control-side number-of-balls BU provided in the game RAM 104. The data is overwritten (backed up) in the unit 106 . Then, when the game control microcomputer 101 receives the number-of-held-balls data request command, the number of owned-balls indicating the number of owned-balls indicated by the number-of-held-balls BU data stored in the game-control-side number-of-held-balls BU section 106 is displayed. A specified command is transmitted to the frame control board 180 .

When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the number-of-held-balls designation command has been received (YES in S5301), it determines whether or not the number of owned-balls indicated by the number-of-held-balls designation command is greater than 0 (S5302). If the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the number of owned balls indicated by the number of owned balls designation command is greater than 0 (YES in S5302), in step S5303, the number of owned balls is stored in the number of owned balls storage unit 185 and the frame control side. Stored in the number-of-balls-held BU section 186 (first number-of-balls-held BU area 186a, second-number-of-balls-held BU area 186b, and third-number-of-held-balls BU area 186c). This is because the fact that the number of balls indicated by the number-of-balls specification command is greater than 0 when the power is turned on means that the data stored in the game control board 100 when the power was turned off was normal. This is because the game control side possession ball number BU data stored in the board 100 is also considered to be normal, and the frame control board 180 restores the game control side ball number BU data as a normal value.

In step S5304, the frame control microcomputer 181 sends a command requesting transmission of data indicating the number of balls held to the effect control board 120 (ball number information transmission request command) to the output buffer of the frame control RAM 184. , and the process for restoring the number of balls held (S5203) ends. The fact that the process has proceeded to step S5304 means that the RAM abnormality notification for frame control is being executed (S5113), so there is a possibility that the store clerk will rush to the pachinko machine PY1. This is so that the store clerk can easily check the number of balls held.

The number-of-balls information transmission request command set in the output buffer of the frame control RAM 184 is transmitted to the game control board 100 by output processing (S5003). When the game control board 100 receives the number-of-balls-information transmission request command, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits data indicating the number of balls to the effect control board 120 . When the effect control board 120 receives the data indicating the number of held balls, it stores the data indicating the number of held balls in the effect control side number of held balls storage section (not shown) provided in the RAM 124 for effect.

In addition, the effect control microcomputer 121, when the game is not being executed, the first effect button 40k receives a first specific operation (for example, a long press operation for 5 seconds), the effect control side holding ball number storage The display unit 50a is caused to display the number of balls in possession indicated by the data stored in the unit. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 121 receives the second specific operation (for example, normal one-time pressing operation) of the first effect button 40k when the number of held balls is displayed on the display unit 50a. The display unit 50a is caused to erase the number of balls held.

On the other hand, when the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the number of possession balls indicated by the command for specifying the number of possession balls on the game control side is not greater than 0, that is, the number of possession balls = 0 (NO in S5302), in step S5305, the display device side The number-of-balls data request signal is output to the number-of-balls display device 301, and the number-of-balls restoration processing (S5202) ends. This means that when the power is turned on, the number of balls indicated by the command for specifying the number of balls on the game control side is "0", which means that the data stored in the game control board 100 when the power is turned off is abnormal, and the game RAM 104 Since it is considered to have been cleared, as will be described later, in order to request data on the number of held balls (display device side number of held balls BU data) stored in the number of held balls display device 301 as a further backup of the number of held balls. is.

As will be described later, every time the number of owned balls is updated in the number of owned balls management process (S5203), the frame control microcomputer 181 generates a signal representing the updated number of owned balls as a backup of the data representing the number of owned balls. (Number of balls held update designation signal) is output to the number of balls held display device 301 . When the number-of-held-balls update designation signal is input, the number-of-held-balls display device 301 overwrites and saves the number of held-balls indicated by the signal in the number-of-held-balls BU section 301d of the display device side as the number-of-balls-held BU data on the display device side. . Then, when the display-device-side-held-balls-data request signal is input, the pitches-held display device 301 displays the number of balls-held indicated by the display-device-side-held-balls-number-BU data stored in the display-device-side-held-balls-number-BU-unit 301d. to the frame control board 180.

When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the number-of-balls designation command has not been received (NO in S5301), it determines whether or not the number-of-balls designation signal has been input (S5306). If the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the display device side number-of-balls designation signal has not been input (NO in S5306), the number-of-balls restoration processing (S5202) is completed, and it is determined that the number-of-balls designation signal has been input. Then (YES in S5306), it is determined whether or not the number of balls in possession indicated by the number of balls in possession designation signal is greater than 0 (S5307).

If the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the number of owned balls indicated by the number of owned balls designation signal is greater than 0 (YES in S5307), in step S5308, the number of owned balls is stored in the number of owned balls storage unit 185 and the frame control side. Stored in the number of owned balls BU section 186 (first number of owned balls BU area 186a, second number of owned balls BU area 186b, and third number of owned balls BU area 186c), and finishes the number of owned balls restoration processing (S5202). . This is because the fact that the number of balls indicated by the number-of-balls designation signal is greater than 0 means that the number of balls on display BU data stored in the number-of-balls display device 301 is normal. This is because the number of balls held is restored in the frame control board 180 as a normal value.

On the other hand, if the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the number of balls indicated by the display device side number-of-balls designation signal is not greater than 0, that is, the number of balls=0 (NO in S5306), in step S5309 is abnormal, and the number of owned balls restoration processing (S5203) ends. If the number of balls indicated by the number-of-balls designation signal on the display device side is "0", it is considered that the number of balls on the display device side BU data stored in the number-of-balls display device 301 is abnormal. Since there is no further backup of the number of balls held, it is assumed that an abnormality has occurred in the number of balls held, and the error notification of the number of balls held is performed to notify the abnormality.

The error notification of the number of owned balls is performed by the number of owned balls display device 301 b of the number of owned balls display device 301 . Therefore, the frame control microcomputer 181 sets a signal requesting execution of the ball count error notification (ball ball count error notification request signal) in the output buffer of the frame control RAM 184 in step S5309. The pitch count error notification request signal set in the output buffer is output to the pitch count display device 301 in output processing (S5003), and the pitch count display device 301 receives the pitch count error notification request signal. Execute number error reporting.

It should be noted that the effect content of the ball number error notification can be appropriately designed, but in the first embodiment, for example, the word "ERROR" representing the error is displayed in the lower five digits portion composed of six 7-segment LEDs. Is displayed. Further, the frame control microcomputer 181 may execute notification of an error in the number of balls held by displaying an image on the display section 50a or by outputting a predetermined sound and warning sound from the speaker 52. FIG.

In step S5309, the frame control microcomputer 181 may set a command requesting execution of notification of the number of balls held error in the output buffer of the frame control RAM 184. FIG. The command set in the output buffer is transmitted to the game control board 100 in the output process (S5003), and when the game control board 100 receives the command, the production control board 120 , and when the effect control board 120 receives the command, the image display device 50 or the speaker 52 may be appropriately made to execute the error notification of the number of balls held.

Next, the firing control process (S5203) will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an example of firing control processing. As shown in FIG. 54, in the launch control process (S5203), the frame control microcomputer 181 determines whether or not the number of owned balls indicated by the number of owned balls master data is greater than "0" (S5301). This is because the number of balls in possession is the number of game balls that the player can use in the game, and the game cannot be executed unless the number of balls in possession is greater than "0".

If the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the number of balls held is not greater than "0", that is, the number of balls held = "0" (NO in S5401), the process proceeds to step S5419, and the number of balls held is greater than "0". (YES in S5401), it indicates whether or not the lock 302 is unlocked, in other words, it indicates that the game ball is prohibited from being shot due to the lock 302 being unlocked, which will be described later. It is determined whether or not the firing prohibition flag is ON (S5402). This is because when the lock 302 is unlocked, the front door 23 is opened, and the game balls that are shot out of the pachinko game machine PY1 may be lost. This is because it is necessary to prohibit the launch. Note that the firing prohibition flag is basically turned ON in a predetermined area of the frame control RAM 184 when the lock 302 is unlocked.

If the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the lock 302 is unlocked (YES in S5402), it proceeds to step S5419. It is determined whether or not the player is touching, in other words, whether or not a detection signal is input from the touch switch 72a (S5403). This is to make the player's operation of the shooting handle 72k a condition for shooting game balls, and to prevent the player from fixing the shooting handle 72k using a coin or a predetermined tool.

If the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the firing handle 72k is not in contact with the player (NO in S5403), it proceeds to step S5419, and if it determines that the firing handle 72k is in contact with the player (YES in S5403). ), it is determined whether or not the firing handle 72k is operated, in other words, whether or not a detection signal from the firing volume knob 72b is input (S5404). This is because the game ball can be shot by operating the shooting handle 72k.

If the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the firing handle 72k has not been operated (NO in S5404), it proceeds to step S5419, and if it determines that the firing handle 72k has been operated (YES in S5404), it executes firing delay. It is determined whether or not it is in the middle, in other words, whether or not a later-described firing delay flag is ON (S5405).

The firing delay means that, in a state where the firing handle 72k is continuously operated, a predetermined unit firing is performed in order to adjust the number of game balls fired per unit time (fixed time such as 60 seconds) to a predetermined value. By delaying the start of control (the cycle is delayed by N balls), the cycle of game ball launch is changed with respect to local unit launch control, and the overall cycle of game ball launch is adjusted. control (fire cycle change control). That is, the unit shot control is a control related to one game ball shot. , and an interval (shooting standby) for waiting for the shooting until the next game ball can be shot after the shot, and are executed at a predetermined cycle. The details of the firing delay (fire cycle change control) and unit firing control will be described later. The firing delay flag is turned ON in a predetermined area of the frame control RAM 184 while the firing delay (fire cycle change control) is being executed (while the firing delay is being executed). Further, although the details will be described later, in the first embodiment, the firing delay (fire cycle change control) is executed for the same time as the time required for one frame control timer interrupt process.

When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the firing delay is being executed (YES in S5405), it cancels the firing delay, specifically turns off the firing delay flag (S5418), and the firing delay is not being executed. (NO in S5405), it is determined whether or not firing standby is being executed, in other words, whether or not a later-described firing standby flag is ON (S5406).

Execution of the shooting standby means that, while the shooting handle 72k is being continuously operated, the number of game balls shot per unit time is adjusted to a predetermined value. It is to make the shooting of game balls stand by in the shooting control. The details of the firing standby will be described later. Note that the firing standby flag is turned on in a predetermined area of the frame control RAM 184 while the firing standby is being executed (while the firing standby is being executed).

If the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the firing standby is being executed (YES at S5406), it proceeds to step S5412, and if it determines that the firing standby is not being executed (NO at S5406), the game ball to be started from now on. (unit firing control) corresponds to the start of unit firing control, in other words, whether or not the counter value of a firing delay activation counter, which will be described later, is "0" (S5407).

The unit shooting control is a control related to the shooting of game balls, which is performed to adjust the number of game balls shot per unit time to a predetermined value while the shooting handle 72k is being continuously operated. It consists of unit firing control for a predetermined number of times (four times in the first embodiment) and firing delay (firing cycle change control) for a predetermined number of times (one time in the first embodiment), and is executed at a predetermined cycle as a whole. . Although details will be described later, in the unit launch control, after repeatedly executing the unit launch control related to launching one game ball a plurality of times (four times in the first embodiment), launch delay (shoot cycle change control) is performed. It is executed a predetermined number of times (once in the first embodiment). The launch delay activation counter counts the remaining number of shots of the game ball in one unit launch control, and is provided in a predetermined area of the frame control RAM 184 . The launch of the game ball when the counter value of the launch delay activation counter is "0" constitutes the start of the unit launch control.

When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines to start unit firing control (YES in S5407), the number of game balls fired in one unit firing control (unit firing number ) is set in the firing delay activation counter (S5408), and the process advances to step S5409. If it is determined not to start the unit firing control (NO in S5407), the process proceeds directly to step S5409 because the unit firing control is in progress. Note that in the first embodiment, the number of unit firings is set to four.

In step S5409, the frame control microcomputer 181 instructs the shooting device 72 to shoot a game ball with a shooting intensity corresponding to the operation of the shooting handle 72k. Shoot game balls. Subsequently, the frame control microcomputer 181 executes shooting standby in order to provide an interval in which the game ball is not shot after shooting the game ball (S5410), and sets the execution period of the shooting standby (S5411). , terminates the launch control process.

Execution of firing standby is performed by turning on a firing standby flag in a predetermined area of the frame control RAM 184 . Also, the setting of the firing standby execution period is performed using a firing standby counter. The firing standby counter is provided in a predetermined area of the frame control RAM 184, and counts the number of executions of the frame control timer interrupt process (150 times in the first embodiment) corresponding to the period during which the firing standby is executed. By setting to , the execution period of waiting for firing is set.

Since the frame control timer interrupt processing is executed every 4 ms, the interval until the next game ball is shot, in other words, the time required for one unit shot control is 600 ms (4 ms x 150 times )It turns out that.

In step S5412, the frame control microcomputer 181 updates the remaining execution period of the firing standby (remaining firing standby period), and determines whether or not to end the firing standby in step S5413. The remaining firing standby period is updated by subtracting "1" from the counter value of the firing standby counter. Further, whether or not to end the firing standby is determined by confirming whether the counter value of the firing standby counter is "0".

When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines not to end the firing standby, that is, when the counter value of the firing standby counter is not "0" (NO in S5413), the firing standby (interval) for one unit firing control is performed. , the firing control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the frame control microcomputer 181 determines to end the firing standby, that is, when the counter value of the firing standby counter is "0" (YES in S5413), the firing standby (interval ), the firing standby is terminated (S5414), the remaining period until the firing delay is executed (fire delay execution remaining period) is updated (S5415), and it is determined whether or not to start the firing delay ( S5416).

The firing standby is terminated by turning OFF the firing standby flag. The firing delay execution remaining period is updated by subtracting "1" from the counter value of the firing delay activation counter. Further, whether or not to start the firing delay is determined by confirming whether or not the counter value of the firing delay activation counter is "0".

When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines not to start the launch delay, that is, when the counter value of the launch delay activation counter is not "0" (NO in S5416), the game ball is launched before the launch delay. Then, the process proceeds to S5409, and when it is determined to start the firing delay, that is, when the counter value of the firing delay activation counter is "0" (YES in S5416), the firing delay is started (S5417), and the firing control process is performed. finish. Execution of the launch delay is performed by turning ON the launch delay flag.

Further, when the frame control microcomputer 181 performs the reset process related to the firing control process in step S5418, the firing control process ends. Note that the reset process related to the firing control process is performed by resetting the flags and counters related to the firing control process. As a result, the unit shot control and the unit shot control are stopped, and when the game ball is shot again, the unit shot control and the unit shot control are executed from the beginning.

Next, the shooting control of the game ball by the frame control microcomputer 181 when the shooting handle 72k is continuously operated in a situation where the shooting of the game ball is permitted will be described. As long as the shooting handle 72k continues to be operated, the shooting control process (S5204) by the frame control microcomputer 181, especially steps S5405 to S5417 is executed, whereby game balls are shot intermittently. When this intermittent shooting is performed, the number of game balls shot per unit time (specified number of shots) is the largest, and the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the number of game balls shot per minute is (the number of shot game balls) is about 99.83. This is stipulated by a predetermined rule that the number of game balls shot per minute should be less than 100, but if the number of game balls shot per unit time drops extremely This is to moderate the number of game balls shot per unit time within a range that does not exceed the upper limit even though there is a risk of receiving a profit. However, the clock that causes the frame control microcomputer 181 to perform the frame control side timer interrupt processing may fluctuate due to changes in the frequency of the crystal oscillator due to room temperature deviation and frequency temperature characteristics. It does not mean that it is appropriate to make the value approach 100 as much as possible.

FIG. 55 shows a time chart showing an example of game ball shooting control when the shooting handle 72k is continuously operated. As described above, game ball launch control includes unit launch control and unit launch control.

Unit launch control is a basic unit of control related to launching a game ball once, is started by launching the game ball, and ends after 600 milliseconds from the launch. Therefore, the unit shot control forms a period (shot cycle) related to one game ball shot. In one unit shot control, the period from when the game ball is first shot until 600 milliseconds has elapsed constitutes an interval period during which the game ball is not shot. Note that the interval of 600 msec is a period of 150 times of the firing control process (frame control side timer interrupt process) because the frame control side timer interrupt process including the firing control process (S5203) is executed every 4 msec. It turns out that. Therefore, the frame control microcomputer 181 fires the game ball in the firing control process (frame control side timer interrupt process), and then fires the game ball in the firing control process (frame control side timer interrupt process) 150 times. Without waiting for the launch of the game ball.

Unit launch control is a basic unit of control related to four game ball launches, and consists of four consecutive unit launch controls and one launch delay (shoot cycle change control). Since the firing control process (frame control side timer interrupt processing) is executed every 4 ms, if the unit firing control is continued without performing the firing delay (fire cycle change control), the number of game balls in one minute The number of shots becomes 100, and the rule of less than 100 is not satisfied. Therefore, after executing unit firing control four times in succession, one firing delay (firing cycle change control) is executed, and then the next unit firing control is started. should be less than 100. Then, one unit launch control is constituted by these four continuous unit launch controls and one subsequent launch delay (fire cycle change control), and in general, this unit launch control is repeated as one set. carry out. As a result, the number of game balls shot in one minute is about 99.83. The time required for one firing delay (firing cycle change control) is 4 msec. That is, one firing delay (firing cycle change control) corresponds to the period of one firing control process (frame control side timer interrupt process).

Next, the number-of-balls management process (S5204) will be described. FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing an example of the number-of-balls management process. As shown in FIG. 56, in the possession ball count management process (S5204), the frame control microcomputer 181 first determines whether or not the ball lending button displayed on the unit display device 300 has been operated (S5501). As described above, when the ball lending button is operated, the unit display device 300 outputs a ball lending operation detection signal indicating that the operation has been detected to the card unit CU. When the card unit CU receives the ball lending operation detection signal, the card unit CU outputs to the frame control board 180 a signal (ball lending request signal) indicating a request for lending a ball. Therefore, frame control microcomputer 181 determines whether or not a ball lending request signal has been input in step S5501.

If the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the lend ball button has not been operated (NO in S5501), it proceeds to step S5504. The number of balls (250 in the first embodiment) is added to the number of held balls (S5502), an update flag indicating that the number of held balls has been updated is turned on (S5503), and the process proceeds to step S5504.

The addition of the number of owned balls in step S5502 is performed by adding the number of game balls according to the ball lending to the number of owned balls indicated by the number of owned balls master data stored in the number of owned balls storage unit 185 . Also, the update flag is turned on in a predetermined area of the frame control RAM 184 .

In step S5504, the frame control microcomputer 181 determines whether or not there has been a prize (a safe ball has been generated) in a prize winning opening (general winning opening 10, first starting opening 11, second starting opening 12, big winning opening 14). judge. As described above, when there is a prize (generation of a safe ball) to various prize-winning ports, the game control microcomputer 101 sends a command (a prize number designation command) indicating the number of prize balls corresponding to the prize to the frame control board 180. Send to Therefore, in step S5504, the frame control microcomputer 181 determines whether or not it has received a prize number designation command.

When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that there is no winning (generation of a safe ball) in the winning openings (general winning opening 10, first starting opening 11, second starting opening 12, big winning opening 14) (NO in S5504) ), the process advances to step S5507, and when it is determined that there is a winning in the winning opening (general winning opening 10, first starting opening 11, second starting opening 12, big winning opening 14) (YES in S5504), the number of prize balls The corresponding number of winning balls is added to the number of balls in possession (S5505), the update flag is turned ON (S5506), and the process proceeds to step S5507.

The addition to the number of owned balls in step S5505 is performed by adding the number of awarded balls indicated by the number of awarded balls designation command to the number of owned balls indicated by the number of owned balls master data stored in the number of owned balls storage unit 185. will be Incidentally, in the first embodiment, the number of prize balls based on winning to the general prize winning opening 10 is 10, the number of prize balls based on winning to the first starting opening 11 is four, and the number of winning balls based on winning to the first starting opening 11 is four. The number of prize balls based on the winning to the big prize opening 14 is two, and the number of prize balls based on the winning to the big prize opening 14 is fifteen.

The frame control microcomputer 181 determines whether or not there is a foul ball in step S5507. As described above, when a foul ball is generated, the foul ball detection sensor 312 a outputs a foul ball detection signal to the frame control board 180 . Therefore, in step S5507, the frame control microcomputer 181 determines whether or not the foul ball detection signal has been input.

If the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that there is no foul ball (NO at S5507), it proceeds to step S5510. ) is added to the number of balls held (S5508), the update flag is turned ON (S5509), and the process proceeds to step S5510. The addition of the number of owned balls in step S5508 is performed by adding “1” to the number of owned balls indicated by the number of owned balls master data stored in the number of owned balls storage unit 185 . This is because foul balls are detected one by one, and the number of balls in possession increases by one when a foul ball is generated.

The frame control microcomputer 181 determines in step S5510 whether or not there is a shot ball. As described above, when a shot ball is generated, the shot ball detection sensor 311 a outputs a shot ball detection signal to the frame control board 180 . Therefore, the frame control microcomputer 181 determines whether or not the ball-fired detection signal has been input in step S5510.

If the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that there is no shot ball (NO at S5510), it proceeds to step S5513. ) is subtracted from the number of balls held (S5511), the update flag is turned ON (S5512), and the process proceeds to step S5513. The subtraction from the number of owned balls in step S5511 is performed by subtracting “1” from the number of owned balls indicated by the number of owned balls master data stored in the number of owned balls storage unit 185 . This is because the shot balls are detected one by one, and the number of held balls is reduced by one when the shot balls are generated.

In step S5513, the frame control microcomputer 181 determines whether or not the update flag is ON, in other words, whether or not addition or subtraction (update) of the number of held balls has been performed. When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the update flag is not ON (NO in S5513), the process proceeds to step S5518. On the other hand, when the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the update flag is turned on (YES in S5513), the frame control number of owned balls A backup process is performed (S5514), a game control ball count backup process is performed (S5515), a game control ball number backup process is performed (S5516), and the process proceeds to step S5518.

The number-of-held-balls backup process for frame control uses the number-of-held-balls indicated by the number-of-held-balls master data as the first-frame-control-side number-of-held-balls BU data stored in the first number-of-held-balls BU area 186a and the second number-of-held-balls data. Reflect (overwrite) the second frame control side possession ball count BU data stored in the number BU area 186b and the third frame control side possession ball number BU data stored in the third frame control side possession ball number BU area 186c. It is done by

The number-of-balls backup process for game control is performed by setting the number-of-balls update specification command indicating the number of balls-in-hand indicated by the number-of-balls master data in the output buffer of the RAM 184 for frame control. The ball number update designation command set in the output buffer is transmitted to the game control board 100 by output processing (S5003). In addition, although not shown, when the game control microcomputer 101 receives a command to update the number of owned balls, the number of owned balls indicated by the command is changed to the number of owned balls stored in the game control side number of owned balls BU section 106. Reflect (overwrite save) in the number of balls BU data. As a result, the data related to the number of possession balls backed up by the game control board 100 is updated.

The number-of-held-balls backup process for the display device is performed by setting the number-of-held-balls update designation signal indicating the number of held-balls indicated by the number-of-held-balls master data to the output buffer of the RAM 184 for frame control. The pitch number update designation signal set in the output buffer is transmitted to the pitch number display device 301 by output processing (S5003). Although not shown, when the number-of-held-balls update designation signal is input, the number-of-held-balls display device 301 updates the number of owned-balls indicated by the signal to the number-of-held-balls stored in the number-of-held-balls storage area 301d. Reflect (overwrite save) in BU data. As a result, the data related to the number of held balls backed up by the number of held balls display device 301 is updated.

In step S5518, the frame control microcomputer 181 determines whether or not the return button displayed on the unit display device 300 has been operated. As described above, when the return button is operated, the unit display device 300 outputs a return operation detection signal indicating that the operation has been detected to the card unit CU. When the return operation detection signal is input, the card unit CU outputs a signal indicating a request for return (return request signal) to the frame control board 180 . Therefore, the frame control microcomputer 181 determines whether or not a return request signal has been input in step S5518.

If the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the return button has not been operated (NO in S5518), it ends the process for managing the number of balls held, and if it determines that the return button has been operated (YES in S5518), the return button is operated. In order to clear the information about the number of possession balls according to , the number of possession balls for frame control is cleared (S5519), the number of possession balls for game control is cleared (S5520), and the number of possession balls for the display device is backed up. (S5521), the number-of-balls-in-hand signal indicating the number of possession-balls indicated by the number-of-balls-in-hand master data is set in the output buffer of the frame control RAM 184 (S5522), and the number-of-handballs management process ends.

The number-of-held-balls clearing process for frame control clears the number-of-held-balls storage unit 185 and the number-of-held-balls BU unit 186 for frame control side, and also clears various data related to the number of owned balls.

The number-of-held-balls clearing process for game control is performed by setting a number-of-held-balls clear specification command for clearing the data related to the number of owned balls in the output buffer of the frame control RAM 184 . The number-of-held-balls clear designation command set in the output buffer is transmitted to the game control board 100 by output processing (S5003). Although not shown, the game control microcomputer 101 clears the game control side ball number BU data stored in the game control side ball number BU unit 106 upon receiving the number of ball possession clear designation command. As a result, data relating to the number of balls held stored in the game control board 100 is erased.

The number-of-held-balls clearing process for display control is performed by setting a number-of-held-balls clear designation signal instructing clearing of data related to the number of owned balls in the output buffer of the frame control RAM 184 . The number-of-balls-clear designation signal set in the output buffer is output to the number-of-balls display device 301 by output processing (S5003). Although not shown, the pitch number display device 301 clears the pitch number BU data stored in the display device side pitch number BU section 301d when the pitch number clear designation signal is input. As a result, the data related to the number of held balls stored in the number of held balls display device 301 is erased.

Also, the number-of-balls signal set in the output buffer of the frame control RAM 184 in step S5522 is output to the card unit CU by output processing (S5003). When the number-of-balls signal is input, the card unit CU updates the number of possession-balls recorded in the IC card to the number of possession-balls indicated by the number-of-balls signal.

After the return button is operated, safe balls, out balls, foul balls, and fired balls are generated, so that the number of held balls recorded on the IC card differs from the actual number of held balls. In order to prevent this, the operation of the return button may be restricted to a state in which the game is not being played.

Next, the fraud detection process (S5205) will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart illustrating an example of fraud detection processing. As shown in FIG. 57, in the fraud detection process (S5205), the frame control microcomputer 181 first determines whether or not there is a discharged ball. (S5601). As described above, the discharged ball detection sensor 310a passes through various winning openings (general winning opening 10, first starting opening 11, second starting opening 12, big winning opening 14) and is discharged outside the game area 6. The game balls (safe balls) and the game balls (out balls) passed through the out port 19 and discharged to the outside of the game area 6 are collected and installed in a collection passage. That is, the game balls that have entered the game area 6 always pass through the collection path as discharged balls in the end.

If the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that there is an ejected ball (YES in S5601), it determines whether the ejected ball detection time is being measured. It is determined whether or not the detection time measurement flag is ON (S5602). A discharge ball detection time measurement flag is turned on in a predetermined area of the frame control RAM 184 . The discharge ball detection time is the time during which the discharge ball detection sensor 310a outputs the discharge ball detection signal. This is the detection time.

When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the discharged ball detection time has not been measured (NO in S5602), it starts measuring the discharged ball detection time (S5603) and ends the fraud detection process (S5206). Measurement of the discharged ball detection time is started by turning on the discharged ball detection time measurement flag in a predetermined area of the frame control RAM 184 . It should be noted that the fact that it is determined in step S5602 that the discharge ball detection time has not been measured means that the discharge ball detection signal has changed from OFF to ON. This is because the measurement of the discharged ball detection time is started when the discharged ball detection signal changes from OFF (undetected) to ON (detected).

When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the discharged ball detection time is being measured (YES in S5602), it updates the discharged ball detection time (S5604) and terminates the fraud detection process (S5206). The discharge ball detection time is measured by adding a time (4 ms) for one frame control timer interrupt process to the discharge ball detection time timer provided in the frame control RAM 184 . It should be noted that determining that the discharged ball detection time is being measured in step S5602 means that the discharged ball detection signal is continuously ON. This is because the discharge ball detection time is measured while the discharge ball detection signal is ON. Therefore, the ejected ball detection time timer indicates the time during which the ejected ball detection signal is ON.

Further, when the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that there is no ejected ball (NO in S5601), it determines whether the ejected ball detection time is being measured, in other words, whether the ejected ball detection time measurement flag is ON. (S5605). When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the discharged ball detection time has not been measured (NO in S5605), the fraud detection process (S5205) ends.

When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the discharged ball detection time is being measured (YES in S5605), the discharged ball detection time, in other words, the value indicated by the discharged ball detection time timer is set to a predetermined illegal specified time (for example, 12 milliseconds) (S5606). If the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the discharged ball detection time is not longer than a predetermined illegally designated time (for example, 12 milliseconds) (NO in S5606), the process proceeds to step S5608, and the discharged ball detection time is equal to the predetermined illegally designated time. If it is determined to be longer than the time (for example, 12 ms) (YES in S5606), fraud notification is performed (S5607).

Here, the ejected ball detection sensor 310a will be described. As described above, the discharge ball detection sensor 310a detects a stainless steel game ball that does not stick to a magnet, but a conventional general steel game ball that has a higher iron content than a stainless steel game ball and sticks to a magnet. Game balls are also detected. As for the specifications of the discharge ball detection sensor 310a, the discharge ball detection sensor 310a detects a passing game ball made of steel that sticks to a magnet for a longer period of time than a stainless steel that does not stick to a magnet, and is turned on. Become. Therefore, an illegal designated time is provided so that the difference between stainless steel and steel can be discerned. Conversely, when a stainless steel game ball that does not stick to a magnet passes through the ejected ball detection sensor 310a, the ejected ball detection sensor 310a does not continue to turn on the ejected ball detection signal for an illegally designated time. Therefore, the fact that the discharged ball detection time is longer than a predetermined illegally designated time (for example, 12 ms) means that a conventional general steel game ball that sticks to a magnet has passed the discharged ball detection sensor 310a. , the pachinko game machine PY1 is mixed with a conventional general steel game ball that sticks to a magnet. For example, when a single stainless steel game ball that does not stick to the magnet passes through the discharge ball detection sensor 310a, the discharge ball detection sensor 310a is turned on for the first time (t1), and the stainless steel game is turned on. When one conventional steel game ball, which has a higher iron content than the ball and sticks to the magnet, passes through the discharged ball detection sensor 310a at the same speed, the time is longer than the first time (t1). Assuming that the specification is such that it is in the ON state for the second time (t2), the illegally designated time is set between the first time (t1) and the second time (t2). In addition, the discharge ball detection sensor 310a can distinguish and detect two passages when two stainless steel game balls that do not stick to the magnet pass in succession. It is configured so that when two passages pass in succession, the two passages cannot be distinguished and detected. A specific value of the illegally designated time can be set appropriately.

Further, the fraud notification in step S5607 is performed by outputting a predetermined alarm sound from the speaker 52. FIG. Since the frame control board 180 and the effect control board 120 are not directly connected, the frame control board 180 has a steel game ball that has a higher iron content than a stainless steel game ball and sticks to a magnet. A fraud notification request command for requesting output of a predetermined alarm sound (execution of fraud notification) indicating that the pachinko game machine PY1 is mixed (detected) is set in the output buffer of the frame control RAM 184. do. The set fraud notification request command is transmitted to the game control board 100 by output processing (S5003). When the game control microcomputer 101 receives the fraudulent notification request command, it transmits to the effect control board 120 a fraudulent notification designation command designating execution of fraudulent notification. When the effect control microcomputer 121 receives the fraudulent notification designation command, it appropriately executes fraudulent notification.

In step S5608, the frame control microcomputer 181 ends the measurement of the discharged ball detection time, and ends the fraud detection process (S5206). Measurement of the ejected ball detection time is terminated by turning off the ejected ball detection time measurement flag and resetting the ejected ball detection time timer.

Next, the firing prohibition process (S5206) will be described. FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing an example of firing prohibition processing. As shown in FIG. 58, in the firing prohibition process (S5206), the frame control microcomputer 181 first determines whether or not the lock 302 is unlocked (S5701). As described above, the unlock detection sensor 302a is configured to detect that the lock 302 is unlocked, and outputs an unlock detection signal to the frame control board 180 when the lock 302 is unlocked. . Therefore, in step S5701, the frame control microcomputer 181 determines whether or not an unlock detection signal is input from the unlock detection sensor 302a.

When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the lock 302 is unlocked (YES in S5701), it determines whether or not shooting of game balls is prohibited (shooting is prohibited) (S5702). If the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the firing is not being prohibited (NO in S5702), the firing prohibition process (S5702) is terminated. On the other hand, when the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the shooting is prohibited (YES in S5702), it prohibits the shooting of the game ball (shooting prohibition) (S5703), and notifies that the shooting is prohibited. A notification effect is executed (S5704), and the firing prohibition process (S5207) ends.

Determination in step S5702 that firing is not prohibited means that the unlock detection signal has changed from OFF to ON, in other words, that lock 302 has been unlocked from a locked state. . This is because the firing prohibition is started when the unlock detection signal turns from OFF to ON. In addition, the fact that the lock 302 is unlocked from the locked state means that the front door 23 may be opened, and when the front door 23 is opened, the game balls are released to the outside of the pachinko game machine PY1. Since there is a risk of it popping out and being lost, firing prohibition is implemented. The firing prohibition is performed by turning on the firing prohibition flag. The firing prohibition flag is turned on in a predetermined area of the frame control RAM 184 . This shooting prohibition (shooting) constitutes the condition (step S5402) for prohibiting the shooting of the game ball in the shooting control process (S5203). Specifically, in step S5402, it is determined that "firing is prohibited" (YES in S5402).

Also, the firing prohibition notification effect is performed on the unit display device 300 . Since the frame control board 180 and the unit display device 300 are not directly connected, the frame control board 180 outputs a firing prohibition notification effect request signal requesting execution of a firing prohibition notification effect for informing that firing is prohibited. is set in the output buffer of the RAM 184 for frame control. The firing prohibition notification effect request signal set in the output buffer is output to the card unit CU by output processing (S5003). When the card unit CU receives the firing prohibition notification effect request signal, the card unit CU causes the unit display device 300 to display an image indicating that firing is prohibited as a firing prohibition notification effect. The specific content of the image indicating that shooting is prohibited can be set as appropriate, but the image indicating that shooting is prohibited may be, for example, an explanatory text indicating that shooting is prohibited: It is now in a state where it is not possible to

When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the lock 302 is not unlocked (NO in S5701), it determines whether or not shooting of game balls is prohibited (shooting is prohibited) (S5705). If the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the firing is not prohibited (NO in S5705), it finishes the firing prohibition process (S5206). (S5706).

Waiting for the shooting permission state is a transition period from shooting prohibition to a state in which shooting of game balls is permitted. This transition period is provided because the determination in step S5705 that firing is prohibited means that the unlock detection signal has changed from ON to OFF, in other words, the lock 302 has been unlocked. This means that the pachinko game machine PY1 has been locked from the locked state, and this is because, for example, a grace period may be required for the pachinko game machine PY1 to be finally confirmed after the clerk of the game parlor has been locked. In addition, the shooting of game balls is prohibited even while waiting for the shooting permission state.

The start of waiting for the firing permission state is performed by turning on a firing permission state standby flag, which will be described later. Therefore, the frame control microcomputer 181 determines in step S5706 whether or not the firing permission state standby flag is ON. The firing permission state standby flag is turned on in a predetermined area of the frame control RAM 184 .

When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that it is not waiting for the firing permission state (NO in S5706), it starts waiting for the firing permission state (S5707). The state standby flag is turned ON, and a firing permission standby notification effect is executed to notify that the firing permission state is to be waited (S5708). Measurement is started (S5709), and the firing prohibition process (S5206) ends.

The launch permission standby notification effect is performed on the unit display device 300 . Since the frame control board 180 and the unit display device 300 are not directly connected, the frame control board 180 requests execution of a firing permission waiting notification effect to notify that the firing is to be permitted. A permission standby notification effect request signal is set in the output buffer of the RAM 184 for frame control. The firing permission standby notification effect request signal set in the output buffer is output to the card unit CU by output processing (S5003). The card unit CU causes the unit display device 300 to display an image indicating waiting until firing is permitted as a firing permission standby notification effect when the firing permission standby notification effect request signal is input. The specific content of the image indicating that the image will wait until the firing is permitted can be set as appropriate. It consists of an explanatory text "Please wait a little longer until you can fire" indicating that you are waiting.

In addition, the remaining firing permission waiting time is determined using a firing permission waiting time timer. A firing permission waiting time timer is provided in a predetermined area of the frame control RAM 184. By setting a time (for example, 30 seconds) to wait until a predetermined firing permission state is set in the firing permission waiting time timer, the firing permission waiting time can be set. Remaining time measurement is started. Note that the firing permission waiting time timer is subtracted by 4 milliseconds in other processing (S5208) of the frame control side timer interrupt processing (S5005).

If the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that it is waiting for the firing permission state (YES in S5706), it determines whether or not to finish waiting for the firing permission state (S5710). The end of waiting for the firing permission state is performed when the firing permission waiting time elapses after the start of the firing permission waiting state, in other words, when the value of the firing permission waiting time timer becomes "0". . Therefore, frame control microcomputer 181 determines whether or not the value of the firing permission waiting time timer is "0" in step S5710.

If the frame control microcomputer 181 does not terminate the standby for the firing permission state, that is, if it determines that the value of the firing permission waiting time timer is not "0" (NO in S5710), it ends the firing prohibition process (S5206). do. On the other hand, when the frame control microcomputer 181 ends waiting for the firing permission state, that is, when it determines that the value of the firing permission waiting time timer is "0" (YES in S5710), it ends waiting for the firing permission state. Then (S5711), a shooting permission notification effect for notifying that the shooting of the game ball is permitted is executed (S5712), the shooting prohibition ends (S5714), and the shooting prohibiting process (S5207) ends.

The end of waiting for the firing permission state is performed by turning OFF the firing permission state waiting flag. Furthermore, the firing prohibition is ended by turning OFF the firing prohibition flag. As a result, it is determined in step S5402 that "shooting is not prohibited" (NO in S5402).

Also, the launch permission notification effect is performed on the unit display device 300 . Since the frame control board 180 and the unit display device 300 are not directly connected, the frame control board 180 displays the firing permission notification effect requesting execution of the firing permission notification effect to notify that the firing is permitted. It is set in the output buffer of the RAM 184 for frame control. The firing permission notification effect request signal set in the output buffer is output to the card unit CU by output processing (S5003). When the card unit CU receives the firing permission notification effect request signal, the card unit CU displays an image indicating that the firing is permitted on the unit display device 300 as the firing permission notification effect. The specific content of the image indicating that the launch is permitted can be set as appropriate, but the image indicating that the launch is permitted is, for example, an explanatory text "launch" indicating that the launch is permitted. Thank you for your cooperation."

Next, the game ball entry prevention process (S5207) will be described. FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing an example of game ball entry prevention processing. As shown in FIG. 59, in the game ball entry prevention process (S5207), the frame control microcomputer 181 first determines whether or not the front door 23 is open (S5801). As described above, the door open detection sensor 23a is configured to detect that the front door 23 is open, and outputs a door open detection signal to the frame control board 180 when the front door 23 is open. Therefore, in step S5801, the frame control microcomputer 181 determines whether or not the front door open detection signal is input from the door open detection sensor 23a.

When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the front door 23 is open (YES in S5801), it determines whether or not the entry blocking device 76 is in operation (S5802).

Here, the entry blocking device 76 will be described. The entry prevention device 76 includes an operable entry prevention movable portion 76k and a drive portion (not shown) that drives the entry prevention movable portion 76k. A drive section that drives the entry blocking movable section 76 k is connected to the frame control board 180 .

FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the entry blocking device 76. As shown in FIG. FIG. 60(A) is a diagram showing a front view of the game board 1, and FIG. 60(B) is a diagram showing a sectional view along line AA of FIG. 60(A) when the entry blocking device 76 is in a standby state. 60(C) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 60(A) when the entry prevention device 76 is in an operating state.

As shown in FIGS. 60(A) and 60(B), the entry blocking movable portion 76k is located at the end of the launch area 7 on the side of the game area 6, in other words, between the game area 6 and the launch area 7 in the launch area 7. located near the border. The entry blocking movable portion 76k is composed of a rectangular plate-shaped tongue member, and in the standby state, the long side direction is parallel to the direction perpendicular to the shooting area 7, and the short side direction and the surface are parallel to the shooting area 6 of the game ball. The entire long side other than the tip is accommodated behind the firing region 7 so as to be substantially perpendicular to the direction of movement inward and so that the tip is smoothly flush with the firing region 7 .

Further, as shown in FIG. 60(B), the launch area 7 in the game board 1 is partitioned by the inner rail 63 and the outer rail 62, but the length in the short side direction of the entry blocking movable portion 76k is 7 and the direction in which the game ball is launched (the direction toward the back of the paper), the length is slightly shorter than the distance sandwiched between the inner rail 63 and the outer rail 62 at the installation position of the entry prevention movable part 76k. It is

Furthermore, the entry blocking movable portion 76k is configured to be capable of linear movement in the front-rear direction, and when it is activated, it moves forward and projects vertically into the firing area 7 as shown in FIG. retained. When the entry prevention movable portion 76k is held in the operating state, the game ball shot toward the game area 6 collides with the entry prevention movable portion 76k, so that the game ball is prevented from entering the game area 6. be. It should be noted that when returning to the standby state of the entry blocking movable portion 76k, it moves backward.

The description returns to the game ball entry prevention process (S5207). When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the entry blocking device 76 is in operation (YES in S5802), the game ball entry blocking process (S5207) is finished. On the other hand, when the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the entry blocking device 76 is not in operation (NO in S5802), it puts the entry blocking device 76 into an operating state (S5803), and ends the game ball entry blocking processing (S5207). .

When the entry blocking device 76 is activated, the entry blocking movable portion 76k whose tip is flush with the game area 6 and whose entire long side direction other than the tip is stored behind the game area 6 is turned forward. It is to move and hold in a protruding state. In step S5803, the frame control microcomputer 181 turns ON an entry prevention device operation flag indicating that the entry prevention device 76 is in an operating state in a predetermined area of the frame control RAM 184. FIG. Therefore, in step S5802, the frame control microcomputer 181 determines whether or not the entry prevention device activation flag is ON.

It should be noted that the fact that it is determined in step S5802 that the entry blocking device 76 is not in operation means that the door open detection signal has changed from OFF to ON, in other words, the front door 23 has been opened from the closed state. means that Further, the fact that it is determined in step S5802 that the entry blocking device 76 is operating means that the door open detection signal continues to be ON, in other words, that the front door 23 continues to be opened. .

When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the front door 23 is not open (NO in S5801), it determines whether the entry prevention device 76 is in operation, in other words, whether the entry prevention device operation flag is ON. It is determined whether or not (S5804). When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the entry prevention device 76 is not in operation, in other words, that the entry prevention device operation flag is not ON (NO in S5804), the game ball entry prevention processing (S5207) is continued. Finish. On the other hand, if the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the entry prevention device 76 is in operation, in other words, that the entry prevention device operation flag is ON (YES in S5804), it puts the entry prevention device 76 into the standby state. (S5805), the game ball entry prevention process (S5207) ends.

Putting the entry blocking device 76 in the standby state means moving the entry blocking movable part 76 k held in a state of protruding from the firing area 7 toward the rear, so that the tip is flush with the firing area 7 . It is to store the entire length in the long side direction behind the emission area 7. The game ball shot toward the game area 6 can enter the game area 6 by returning the entry blocking device 76 to the standby state. Note that the frame control microcomputer 181 turns off the entry prevention device operation flag in step S5805.

It should be noted that the determination in step S5804 that the entry blocking device 76 is in operation means that the door open detection signal has changed from ON to OFF, in other words, the front door 23 has been closed from an open state. means that Determination in step S5804 that the entry blocking device 76 is not in operation means that the front door open detection signal continues to be OFF, in other words, that the front door 23 continues to be closed. .

Next, the electrical configuration of the effect control board 120 side of the pachinko game machine PY1 will be described. FIG. 61 is a block diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration related to the effect control board 120. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 61, the effect control board 120 is connected to the upper frame lamp 53U through the upper frame lamp driver board 162, is connected to the lower frame lamp 53D through the lower frame lamp driver board 163, and is connected to the board It is connected to the rotating member motor 55m1 and the lifting member motor 55m2 via the movable device driver board 164, and is connected to the effect button sensor 40a via the effect button relay board 165.

In addition, the upper frame lamp 53U, the lower frame lamp 53D, and the effect button 40k are installed in the front door 23, and accordingly, the upper frame lamp driver board 162, the lower frame lamp driver board 163, and the effect button relay The board 165 is also installed at a predetermined location on the front door 23 . On the other hand, the board movable body 55k (lifting member 55k2 and rotating member 55k1) is installed on the game board 1, and the board movable device driver board 164 is also installed at a predetermined position on the game board 1 accordingly.

Further, in the first embodiment, the first effect button 40k is configured to vibrate. Inside the protruding base 34, a performance button motor 40m serving as a drive source for vibrating the first performance button 40k is mounted. The effect button motor 40m is connected to the effect control board 120 via the effect button relay board 165 .

The upper frame lamp driver board 162 is provided with an input/output port (upper frame lamp input/output port 162a) for inputting and outputting signals. Similarly, the lower frame lamp driver board 163 is also provided with an input/output port (lower frame lamp input/output port 163a) for inputting and outputting signals. Further, the board movable device driver board 164 is also equipped with an input/output port (board movable device input/output port 164a) for inputting and outputting signals. The effect button relay board 165 is also provided with an input/output port (effect button input/output port 165a) for inputting and outputting signals.

The input/output port 162a for the upper frame lamp, the input/output port 163a for the lower frame lamp, the input/output port 164a for the board movable device, and the input/output port 165a for the production button are equipped with a large number of pins, and each input/output port Information (address information) specifying an address using the pin is set in 162a, 163a, 164a, and 165a. The address information associated with each of the input/output ports 162a, 163a, 164a, and 165a consists of manufacturer identification information consisting of upper 4 bits and device identification information consisting of lower 3 bits.

The manufacturer identification information is information that specifies the manufacturer (company A in the first embodiment) of the pachinko gaming machine PY1. Therefore, the manufacturer identification information (upper frame lamp manufacturer identification information) set in the upper frame lamp input/output port 162a and the manufacturer identification information (lower frame lamp manufacturer identification information) set in the lower frame lamp input/output port 163a information), the manufacturer identification information set in the board movable device input/output port 164a (board movable device manufacturer identification information), and the manufacturer identification information set in the effect button input/output port 165a (effect button manufacturer identification information). On the other hand, the device identification information is information for specifying a device (apparatus) in the pachinko gaming machine PY1. Therefore, the device identification information (upper frame lamp device identification information) set in the upper frame lamp input/output port 162a and the device identification information (lower frame lamp device identification information) set in the lower frame lamp input/output port 163a information), device identification information (movable board device device identification information) set in the board movable device input/output port 164a, and device identification information set in the effect button input/output port 165a (effect button device identification information).

The specific contents of each manufacturer identification information and each device identification information can be set appropriately, but in the first embodiment, the manufacturer identification information associated with the manufacturer (company A) of the pachinko game machine PY1 (Upper frame lamp manufacturer identification information, lower frame lamp manufacturer identification information, panel movable device manufacturer identification information, effect button device manufacturer identification information) are set to "1.0.1.0" from the upper side. In the first embodiment, as the manufacturer identification information indicating the manufacturer of the pachinko game machine different from the company A, the manufacturer identification information associated with the company B is "0.0.1.0" from the upper side. , the manufacturer identification information associated with company C is set to "0.0.0.1" from the upper side, and the manufacturer identification information associated with company D is set to "0.0.1" from the upper side. 1, 0, 1". In this way, the manufacturer identification information representing each manufacturer differs from each other.

The upper frame lamp device identification information is set to "0.0.1" from the upper side, the lower frame lamp device identification information is set to "0.1.0" from the upper side, and the board movable device device identification information is set to "1.0.0" from the upper side, and the performance button device identification information is set to "0.1.1" from the higher side.

In addition, the production control board 120 is connected to the upper frame lamp input/output port 162a, the lower frame lamp input/output port 163a, the board movable device input/output port 164a, and the production button input/output port 165a. A controller 128 is mounted that functions as an interface between the microcomputer 121 and these input/output ports 162a, 163a, 164a, and 165a. Note that the controller 128 is composed of a microcomputer. Also, the controller 128 is connected to input/output ports 162a, 163a, 164a, and 165a by communication cables such as predetermined harnesses.

The controller 128 can be connected to the upper frame lamp input/output port 162a, the lower frame lamp input/output port 163a, the board movable device input/output port 164a, and the effect button input/output port 165a by synchronous serial communication. The controller 128 is on the master side, and the upper frame lamp input/output port 162a, the lower frame lamp input/output port 163a, the board movable device input/output port 164a, and the effect button input/output port 165a are on the slave side. It has become. Although detailed description is omitted, a clock is output from the master side to the slave side, and data is transmitted and received by the master side in synchronization with the clock.

The controller 128, based on instructions from the effect control microcomputer 121, the input/output port 162a for the upper frame lamp, the input/output port 163a for the lower frame lamp, the input/output port 164a for the board movable device, and the input/output port for the effect button. 165a, the upper frame lamp 53U, the lower frame lamp 53D, the rotating member motor 55m1 (rotating member 55k1), the lifting member motor 55m2 (lifting member 55k2), and the production button motor 40m (First production button 40k) is operated.

When the upper frame lamp 53U is caused to emit light, the controller 128 sends data including address information relating to the upper frame lamp input/output port 162a and information indicating the light emission mode of the upper frame lamp 53U to the upper frame lamp input/output port 162a. to send. When the upper frame lamp driver board 162 receives the data including the address specifying information related to the upper frame lamp input/output port 162a, based on the information indicating the light emission mode of the upper frame lamp 53U included in the data, The upper frame lamp 53U is made to emit light.

When the controller 128 causes the lower frame lamp 53D to emit light, the controller 128 sends data including address information relating to the lower frame lamp input/output port 163a and information indicating the light emission mode of the lower frame lamp 53D to the lower frame lamp input/output port 163a. to send. When the lower frame lamp driver board 163 receives the data including the address information related to the lower frame lamp input/output port 163a, the lower frame lamp driver board 163, based on the information indicating the light emission mode of the lower frame lamp 53D included in the data, The frame lamp 53D is made to emit light.

When the lifting member 55k2 is moved up and down and when the rotating member 55k1 is rotated, the controller 128 outputs address information related to the moving board device input/output port 164a and the operation of the lifting member 55k2 to the input/output port 164a for the moving board device. Data including information indicating a mode (operation mode of the lifting member motor 55m2) and an operation mode of the rotating member 55k1 (operation mode of the rotating member motor 55m1) are transmitted. When the movable board device driver board 164 receives the data including the address information related to the movable board device input/output port 164a, the movable board device driver board 164 determines the operation mode of the lifting member 55k2 and the operation mode of the rotating member 55k1 included in the data. Based on the indicated information, the lifting member 55k2 (lifting member motor 55m2) and the rotating member 55k1 (rotating member motor 55m1) are operated.

When vibrating the first effect button 40k, the controller 128 stores the address information related to the effect button input/output port 165a and the operation mode of the first effect button 40k (the effect button motor 40m (operation mode)). When the effect button relay board 165 receives the data including the address information related to the effect button input/output port 165a, the operation mode of the first effect button 40k included in the data (the operation mode of the effect button motor 40m) ), the first effect button 40k (effect button motor 40m) is operated.

The controller 128 operates the upper frame lamp 53U, the lower frame lamp 53D, and the lifting member 55k2 (lifting member motor 55m2) and rotating member 55k1 (rotating member motor 55m1). , When vibrating the first production button 40k (production button motor 40m), data including address information related to various input/output ports 162a, 163a, 164a, and 165a is transmitted to various input/output ports 162a, 163a, 164a, and 165a. However, data including address information related to the various input/output ports 162a, 163a, 164a, and 165a are naturally sent to the various input/output ports 162a, 163a, 164a, and 165a without particular mention below. and

Further, when each of the upper frame lamp input/output port 162a, the lower frame lamp input/output port 163a, the board movable device input/output port 164a, and the effect button input/output port 165a receives data from the controller 128, Send an ACK (ACKnowledge) to the controller 128 for an affirmative response. The controller 128 connects each corresponding device (upper frame lamp 53U , lower frame lamp 53D, rotating member motor 55m1, lifting member motor 55m2, and performance button motor 41m), whether ACK (ACKnowledge) is received from the destination judge. When the controller 128 determines that ACK has not been received from the destination, the input/output port 162a for the upper frame lamp, the input/output port 163a for the lower frame lamp, the input/output port 164a for the board movable device, and the production button Data (driver board transmission error data) indicating that an error has occurred in transmission to the input/output port 165 a is transmitted to the effect CPU 122 . The driver board transmission error signal only indicates that a transmission error has occurred to any of the input/output ports 162a, 163a, 164a, and 165a, and does not indicate the type of input/output port in which the transmission error occurred. In addition, when the controller 128 transmits the driver board transmission error data to the performance CPU 122, the registers (not shown) provided inside the controller 128 store the input/output ports 162a, 163a, 164a, 165a is stored.

In the first embodiment, the speaker 52 is connected to the image CPU 141 via the audio control circuit 161, and the image CPU 141 controls audio. Also, data relating to audio is stored in the image ROM 142 . Also, the production control board 120 is equipped with an RTC (Real Time Clock) 129 capable of measuring time.

Next, the production control main processing according to the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing an example of the effect control main processing in the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 62, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs operation confirmation processing (S4002) relating to various effect devices after power-on processing (S4001) and before interrupt prohibition (S4003). It should be noted that the interrupt prohibition in step S4003, the random number seed update process in step S4004, the command transmission process in step S4005, and the interrupt permission in step S4006 differ from those in the basic embodiment in terms of step numbers, but the control contents are basically the same. embodiment.

Here, the operation confirmation process (S4002) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a flowchart illustrating an example of operation confirmation processing. As shown in FIG. 63, in the operation confirmation process, the effect control microcomputer 121 first starts measuring the operation confirmation normal judgment time in step S4051. The operation confirmation normal judgment time is determined by various operable production devices (image display device 50, speaker 52, frame lamp 53 (upper frame lamp 53U, lower frame lamp 53D), board movable device 55, first production button device 40) This is the time for judging that the operation is normal as a result of the operation check, and is composed of the elapsed time after the start of the operation check process. Although the specific time of the operation confirmation normal judgment time can be set as appropriate, it is set to 60 seconds in the first embodiment.

Note that while the operation check process (S4002) is being performed, the 1ms timer interrupt process (S4011) described in the basic embodiment has not yet been executed. Since the update process (S4104) has not yet been executed, the effect control microcomputer 121 appropriately executes measurement of the operation check normality determination time based on the RTC129.

After the production control microcomputer 121 starts measuring the operation confirmation normal judgment time, various production devices (image display device 50, speaker 52, frame lamp 53 (upper frame lamp 53U, lower frame lamp 53D), board movable device 55, the operation check related to the first effect button device 40) is sequentially executed (S4052 to S4057).

In step S4052, the effect control microcomputer 121 issues a command (image/audio operation confirmation start command) indicating the content of the operation confirmation in order to perform operation confirmation (image/audio operation confirmation) of the image display device 50 and the speaker 52. It is transmitted to the image control board 140 .

When the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 receives the image/audio operation confirmation start command, the image/audio operation confirmation start command is used to generate an operation confirmation image (moving image) in the VDP 144 for a predetermined time (30 seconds). ) is appropriately displayed on the display unit 50a. Further, when the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 receives the image/audio operation confirmation start command, the image/audio operation confirmation start command is used to generate an operation confirmation sound composed of a predetermined time (30 seconds). It is output from the speaker 52 appropriately via the control circuit 161 .

In step S4053, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs a command (board movable body operation check start command) to the controller 128;

When the controller 128 receives the operation confirmation start command of the movable board, the controller 128 moves the lifting member 55k2 and the rotating member 55k1 for operation confirmation for a predetermined time (15 seconds) based on the command to start operation confirmation of the movable board. The board moving device 55 (the lifting member motor 55m2 and the rotating member motor 55m1) is caused to perform the operation appropriately.

In step S4054, the effect control microcomputer 121 issues a command (frame Lamp operation confirmation start command) is transmitted to the controller 128 .

When the controller 128 receives the frame lamp operation confirmation start command, the controller 128 appropriately emits light for operation confirmation configured for a predetermined time (20 seconds) based on the frame lamp operation confirmation start command. 53U and lower frame lamp 53D). Specifically, the controller 128 first causes the upper frame lamp 53U to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode for operation confirmation, and then causes the lower frame lamp 53D to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode for operation confirmation.

In step S4055, the effect control microcomputer 121 issues a command (effect button operation confirmation start command) to the controller 128 .

When the controller 128 receives the effect button operation confirmation start command, the controller 128 appropriately vibrates the first effect button 40k for operation confirmation configured for a predetermined time (10 seconds) based on the effect button operation confirmation start command. 1 The production button device 40 is made to execute.

In the slow chart of the operation confirmation process, it seems that the image and sound operation confirmation, the board movable body operation confirmation, the frame lamp operation confirmation, and the effect button operation confirmation are performed in order, but this is because the start timing is in this order. , they are actually started and executed almost at the same time.

After completing various operation confirmations, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the operation confirmation normal judgment time has elapsed in step S4056. If the performance control microcomputer 121 determines that the operation check normality determination time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S4056. That is, the production control microcomputer 121 repeats the step S4056 until it is determined that the operation check normality determination time has elapsed. On the other hand, when the performance control microcomputer 121 determines that the operation check normality determination time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S4057.

Here, as described above, when the controller 128 causes the upper frame lamp 53U and the lower frame lamp 53D to emit light, operates the board movable body 55k (rotating member 55k1, lifting member 55k2), and the first production button When vibrating 40k, the input/output port 162a for the upper frame lamp, the input/output port 163a for the lower frame lamp, the input/output port 164a for the board movable device, and the input/output port 165a for the effect button each receive data from the controller 128. Upon receipt, an ACK is sent to the controller 128, but if the controller 128 does not receive the ACK, the upper frame lamp 53U and the lower frame lamp 53D corresponding to the input/output ports 162a, 163a, 164a, 165a, and the board movable The body 55k (rotating member 55k1, lifting member 55k2) and the first effect button 40k are not operating. Then, the controller 128 provides data for causing the upper frame lamp 53U to emit light, data for causing the lower frame lamp 53D to emit light, data for operating the board movable body 55k (rotating member 55k1, lifting member 55k2), and If the data for vibrating the 1 effect button 40k is transmitted but the ACK is not received for the transmission, the controller 128 is loaded with data indicating that the ACK from the input/output port has not been received. stored in a register

Therefore, in step S4057, the effect control microcomputer 121 confirms the controller 128, and confirms the operation of the board movable body 55k (rotating member 55k1, lifting member 55k2 ), the upper frame lamp 53U, the lower frame lamp 53D, and the first effect button 40k could not be operated (abnormal operation error). When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that there is no abnormal operation error, it finishes the operation confirmation process and returns to the effect control main process. On the other hand, when the production control microcomputer 121 determines that there is an abnormal operation error, the process proceeds to step S4058.

The effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not there is a frame mismatch error in step S4058. The frame mismatch error means that the combination of the front door 23 with respect to the game board 1 is mismatched, that is, the game board 1 and the front door 23 are not aligned. Data indicating that ACK has not been received from all of the upper frame lamp input/output port 162a, the lower frame lamp input/output port 163a, and the performance button input/output port 165a installed on the front door 23 is stored. If no data indicating that ACK has not been received from the board movable device input/output port 164a installed on the game board 1 is stored, it is determined as a frame mismatch error.

If ACK is not received from any part of the input/output port 162a for the upper frame lamp, the input/output port 163a for the lower frame lamp, and the input/output port 165a for the effect button, the input/output port is damaged or malfunctions. However, although ACK has been received from the panel movable device input/output port 164a, the upper frame lamp input/output port 162a, the lower frame lamp input/output port 163a, and the effect If ACK has not been received from all of the input/output ports 165a for buttons, the manufacturer identification information set in the input/output ports 162a, 163a, and 165a is changed from the manufacturer identification information included in the data transmitted from the controller 128. is considered to be inconsistent with This means that there is a high possibility that the front door 23 attached to the pachinko game machine PY1 is made by another manufacturer.

When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that there is a frame incompatibility error in step S4058, in step S4059, it performs frame incompatibility error notification for informing that a frame incompatibility error has occurred. Although the effect mode of the frame mismatch error notification can be set as appropriate, in the first embodiment, an image (frame mismatch error notification image) indicating that a frame mismatch error has occurred is displayed on the display unit 50a. ing. The specific display contents of the frame mismatch error notification image can be appropriately set within a range where the store clerk of the amusement arcade can recognize that the frame mismatch error has occurred. It consists of an explanatory text "The front door may not be aligned. Please check."

The effect control microcomputer 121 transmits to the image control board 140 a command (frame mismatch error notification start command) indicating the effect content of the frame mismatch error notification in step S4059. When the image control board 140 receives the frame mismatch error notification start command, the frame mismatch error notification is performed based on the frame mismatch error notification start command. In the first embodiment, the image control board 140 displays a frame mismatch error notification image (description "The front door may not match. Please check.") on the display unit 50a. If any image is displayed on the display unit 50a at the timing of starting the frame mismatch error notification, even if the frame mismatch error notification image is superimposed on the image, it is erased from the image and the frame mismatch error notification image is displayed. An error notification image may be displayed.

In addition, when the production control microcomputer 121 determines that it is not a frame mismatch error in step S4058, in step S4060, it performs operation abnormality error notification according to the type of input/output port to which ACK is not transmitted. Although the performance mode of the abnormal operation error notification can be set as appropriate, in the first embodiment, the display is configured by displaying an image (abnormal operation error notification image) indicating that an abnormal operation error has occurred on the display unit 50a. ing.

The specific display content of the abnormal operation error notification is appropriately set within a range that allows the store clerk to recognize that an abnormal operation error has occurred according to the type of input/output port to which ACK has not been sent. It is possible, but in the first embodiment, it is composed of an explanatory text indicating that an abnormal operation error has occurred according to the type of input/output port to which ACK has not been sent. For example, when ACK is not transmitted only from the upper frame lamp input/output port 162a, the explanation consists of "There is an error related to the upper frame lamp. Please check." If ACK is not transmitted only from 163a, the explanation consists of "The lower frame lamp is abnormal. Please check." is composed of "There is an abnormality related to the effect button. Please check." Also, if ACK is not sent from the input/output port 162a for the upper frame lamp and the input/output port 163a for the lower frame lamp, the explanation is "There is an error in the relationship between the upper frame lamp and the lower frame lamp. Please check." Please.", and if ACK has not been sent from the input/output port 163a for the lower frame lamp and the input/output port 165a for the effect button, the explanation is "There is an error in the relationship between the bottom frame lamp and the effect button. Please confirm.", and if ACK has not been sent from the effect button input/output port 165a and the upper frame lamp input/output port 162a, the explanation is "The relation between the effect button and the upper frame lamp is It is abnormal. Please check it.".

The effect control microcomputer 121 transmits a command (operation abnormality error notification start command) indicating the effect contents of the operation abnormality error notification to the image control board 140 in step S4060. When receiving the operation abnormality error notification start command, the image control board 140 executes operation abnormality error notification based on the operation abnormality error notification start command.

In addition, the microcomputer 121 for production|presentation control does not progress to any process after step S4059 and step S4060, and does not progress to the production|presentation control main process. Therefore, the effect corresponding to the game by the effect control board 120 cannot be performed. This is to prevent an effect corresponding to the game from being executed while an error related to the effect is occurring. Therefore, after this, for example, when the error is resolved by a game shop clerk or the like and the power is turned on again, it is determined that there is no abnormal operation error in step S4057, and the process proceeds to the effect control main process, and the game is performed. production becomes feasible. Further, after the start of the frame mismatch error notification and the abnormal operation error notification, it is assumed that the notification is continued until the power is cut off. However, even if either or either of the frame mismatch error notification and the abnormal operation error notification ends when a predetermined time elapses after starting, they are terminated when the first effect button 40k is operated. Also good.

As described above, according to the pachinko game machine PY1, the frame control board 180 (control means) capable of executing control (predetermined control) relating to game balls, and the frame control RAM 184 (storage means) capable of storing predetermined data. ), the frame control RAM 184 (storage means) includes a pitch number storage unit 185 (first storage unit) and a frame control side pitch number BU unit 186 (second storage unit). The storage unit 185 stores data representing the number of held balls (specified matter) as master data of the number of held balls (main data), and the frame control side number of held balls BU unit 186 stores data representing the number of held balls (specified matter). are stored as frame control side ball possession number BU data (sub-data), and the frame control board 180 stores the checksum related to the frame control RAM 184 as not matching and the frame control RAM 184 is abnormal. When it is determined, it is determined whether or not the three frame control side ball possession BU data all match (predetermined conditions are satisfied). Based on the BU data of the number of held balls, newly generated master data of the number of held balls is stored in the number of held balls storage unit 185 . Although the checksum related to the frame control RAM 184 does not match, the fact that the three pieces of frame control side possession ball number BU data all match means that the frame control side possession ball number BU section 186 is normally maintained. likely to be. Then, by newly generating master data of the number of possession balls using the frame control side number of possession balls BU data, even if an abnormality occurs in any of the frame control RAM 184 that stores the data representing the number of possession balls, Even if there is, data representing the number of balls held can be generated to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

In addition, the frame control board 180 determines whether the checksum related to the frame control RAM 184 matches in power-on processing (S5001) of the frame control main processing performed when power is supplied to the frame control board 180. It is determined whether or not, in other words, whether or not the frame control RAM 184 is abnormal. Furthermore, since it is possible to secure the data representing the number of game balls that can be used in the game, that is, the number of balls in possession, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged. Furthermore, since it is a condition for newly generating the number-of-balls master data that the number-of-balls-handled BU data on the frame control side match, the reliability of the number-of-handled-balls master data can be enhanced.

The pachinko game machine PY1 includes a frame control board 180 (specific control means) that controls the number of balls held (predetermined matter) that can change according to the progress of the game, and a game control board 100 (non-specific control means) different from the frame control board 180 The frame control board 180 has a ball number storage unit 185 (specific storage unit) for storing ball number master data (first data) representing the number of balls held, and the game control board 100 has a game control side possession ball number BU unit 106 (non-specific storage unit) that stores game control side possession ball number BU data (second data) representing the game control side possession ball number BU, and the frame control board 180 is a ball possession By updating the number master data (predetermined condition is established), the number of possession balls designation command (third data) representing the number of possession balls represented by the number master data of possession balls is transmitted to the game control board 100, and the game control board When the 100 receives the number-of-balls designation command, it updates the number-of-balls-on-the-game BU data stored in the number-of-balls-on-game-control BU unit 106 based on the number-of-balls-designation command. Therefore, the game control board 100 can also store the data representing the number of balls held, and the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged.

In addition, when the frame control board 180 determines that the frame control RAM 184 is abnormal because the checksum related to the frame control RAM 184 does not match, the frame control board 180 determines that the number of owned balls master data is based on the number of owned balls BU data on the game control side. is newly generated and stored in the number-of-balls-held storage unit 185. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged. Furthermore, the frame control board 180 determines whether the checksum related to the frame control RAM 184 matches in power-on processing (S5001) of the frame control main processing that is performed when power is supplied to the frame control board 180. No, in other words, it is judged whether or not the RAM 184 for frame control is abnormal, and if it is abnormal, a command for requesting data on the number of possession balls is immediately transmitted to the game control board 100, so that the disadvantage suffered by the player is reduced. expansion can be suppressed. In addition, the frame control board 180 can update the number of owned balls master data stored in the number of owned balls storage unit 185 according to the progress of the game. Therefore, the reliability of the game control side ball possession number BU data can be enhanced.

Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 includes a frame control board 180 (specific control means) that controls the number of balls (the number of game media that the player can use in a game) and an image display device 50 (display means). In addition, the frame control board 180 has a frame control RAM 184 (specific storage unit) that stores the number of possession balls master data representing the number of possession balls, and the frame control board 180 stores the checksum related to the frame control RAM 184. When the frame control board 180 determines that an abnormality has occurred in the frame control RAM 184, the image display device 50 (display means) determines whether the frame control RAM 184 has an abnormality. , It is possible to display the number of balls held. Therefore, even if an abnormality occurs in the frame control RAM 184, the store clerk or the player can check the number of balls held, thereby preventing the player from being disadvantaged.

Further, since the image display device 50 displays the number of held balls on the condition that the first effect button 40k (operation means) is long-pressed (predetermined operation), the number of held balls can be displayed only when necessary. and convenience is improved. Furthermore, since it is possible to accept a long press (predetermined operation) of the first effect button 40k (operation means) during a period (predetermined period) in which no game is played, the game is hindered and the player's desire to play. can be prevented from declining. In addition, since the image display device 50 displays the number of held balls based on the game control side number of held balls BU data updated in accordance with the progress of the game, the reliability of the number of held balls displayed on the image display device 50 is increased. can enhance sexuality.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1, the frame control board 180 (specific control means) for controlling the number of balls held (the number of game media that the player can use in the game), the number of held balls display device 301 (display means), the frame control board 180 has a frame control RAM 184 (specific storage unit) for storing the number of possession balls master data (first number data) representing the number of possession balls, and the display device 301 of the number of possession balls has a display device side held ball number BU unit 301d (non-specific storage unit) that stores the display device side held ball number BU data (second number data) representing the number of held balls, and the display device for the number of held balls 301 , the number of held balls indicated by the display device side held pitches BU data stored in the display device side held pitches BU section 301d can be displayed. Therefore, even if an abnormality occurs in the frame control RAM 184, the store clerk or the player can check the number of balls held, thereby preventing the player from being disadvantaged.

In addition, the frame control board 180 updates the number-of-balls master data (establishes a predetermined condition) so that the number-of-balls-held update designation signal (specific data) representing the number of balls-held represented by the number-of-balls master data is generated. When the pitch update designation signal is input, the pitch display device 301 stores the pitch count update designation signal in the display device side pitch count BU unit 301d. Update the number of balls held on the display device side BU data. It is possible to improve the reliability of the display device side ball holding BU data. In addition, since the master data of the number of possession balls can be updated according to the progress of the game, and is used as a condition for outputting the update designation signal of the number of possession balls, the reliability of the BU data of the number of possession balls on the display device side can be improved. can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as described above, when the steel game ball to which the magnet sticks passes the discharge ball detection sensor 310a, and when the stainless steel game ball passes the discharge ball detection sensor 310a, the discharge ball detection sensor 310a The detection time (ejection ball detection time) is different. Specifically, when a steel game ball to which a magnet sticks passes through the discharged ball detection sensor 310a, the discharged ball detection time is longer. The pachinko game machine PY1 is basically a game machine in which a game is played by causing stainless steel game balls to flow down to the game area 6. Equipped with a discharged ball detection sensor 310a (detection sensor) for detecting a ball, and a frame control board 180. When the discharged ball detection sensor 310a detects a steel game ball that sticks to a magnet or a stainless steel game ball, the corresponding detection is performed. is output to the frame control board 180, and when the discharged ball detection signal is input, the frame control board 180 measures the time during which the discharged ball detection signal is input. Therefore, it can be recognized that the steel game ball to which the magnet sticks has been discharged out of the game area 6 as the discharged ball. In addition, the frame control board 180, when the time during which the discharged ball detection signal is input is longer than the illegally specified time (12 ms), the illegal notification ( Since the specific notification) is performed, it is possible to make the game parlor recognize that the steel game ball that sticks to the magnet has been mixed. In addition, since the discharge ball detection sensor 310a is installed in the collection passage formed outside the game area 6 through which the game balls that have entered the game area 6 can be collected and pass through, the steel game balls stick to the magnet. The performance of detecting is improved.

Further, the pachinko game machine PY1 is a gaming machine in which a game area 6 through which shot game balls can flow down and a shooting area 7 through which the shot game balls can pass toward the game area 6 are formed. The launch area 7 is provided with an entry prevention movable portion 76k (movable portion) that can be switched between a standby state and an operating state, and the entry prevention movable portion 76k moves toward the game area 6 in the standby state. The ball is allowed to pass, and the game ball moving toward the game area 6 is not allowed to pass in the operating state. Therefore, when the front door 23 is open, it is possible to prevent the game balls from entering the game area 6, rolling around, and jumping out of the pachinko game machine PY1. can.

Furthermore, the pachinko game machine PY1 is further provided with a launcher 72 (shooting means) for shooting game balls. Since a foul ball recovery port (recovery port) is formed for recovering the game ball that moves as a foul ball, the entry into the game area 6 is blocked by the entry blocking movable portion 76k, and the game ball moves toward the shooting device 72. (Return) The game ball can be collected as it is as a foul ball. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the game ball from jumping out of the pachinko game machine PY1. In addition, the pachinko game machine PY1 includes a frame-shaped inner frame 22 and a game board 1 formed with a game area 6 and fitted into an opening 1A (fitting hole) formed in the inner frame, The firing device 72 is installed on the inner frame 22, the firing device 72 is formed over the inner frame 22 and the game board 1, and the entry blocking movable portion 76k is a portion formed on the inner frame 22 of the firing area 7. It is arranged near the boundary between the inner frame 22 and the game board 1. - 特許庁Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the game ball from jumping out of the pachinko game machine PY1. Furthermore, a front door 23 supported openable and closable by the inner frame 22 on the front side of the game area 6 and the shooting area 7 is further provided, and the entry prevention movable part 76k is operated according to the opening of the front door 23. It switches from the standby state to the active state. Therefore, it is possible to further prevent the game balls from jumping out of the pachinko game machine PY1.

In addition, the pachinko game machine PY1 includes a front door 23 supported openable and closable on the front side of the game area 6 where the shot game ball can flow down, and a door open detection sensor for detecting that the front door 23 is opened. 23a (detection means), and when the opening of the front door 23 is not detected by the door open detection sensor 23a, the entry of the game ball into the game area 6 is enabled, and the door open detection sensor When the opening of the front door 23 is detected by 23a, entry of the game ball into the game area 6 is blocked. Therefore, when the front door 23 is opened, it is possible to prevent the game balls from jumping out of the pachinko game machine PY1.

Furthermore, in the pachinko game machine PY1, a shooting area 7 through which the game ball can pass toward the game area 6 is formed downstream of the game area 6 with respect to the shooting of the game ball. When the opening of the front door 23 is not detected, the game ball moving toward the game area 6 in the shooting area is allowed to enter the game area 6, and the opening of the front door 23 is detected by the door opening detection sensor 23a. When detected, entry into the game area 6 of a game ball moving toward the game area 6 in the launch area 7 is blocked. Therefore, when the front door 23 is open, it is possible to further prevent game balls from jumping out of the pachinko game machine PY1. In addition, in the shooting area 7, an entry prevention movable part 76k that can be switched between a standby state in which game balls moving toward the game area 6 pass and an operating state in which game balls moving toward the game area 6 do not pass is provided, and the entry blocking movable portion 76k is normally held in a standby state, and is switched from the standby state to the operating state when the opening of the front door 23 is detected by the door opening detection sensor 23a. It is possible to more reliably prevent the game machine PY1 from jumping out of the game machine PY1.

In addition, the pachinko game machine PY1 is a game machine provided with a front door 23 supported openable and closable on the front side of the game area 6 where shot game balls can flow down. A lock 302 capable of holding the door 23 closed and releasing the closure is provided. When the release of the closed state is not detected by the sensor 302a, shooting of the game ball is allowed, and when the release of the closed state is detected by the unlock detection sensor 302a, shooting of the game ball is prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent game balls from jumping out of the pachinko game machine PY1. Furthermore, the pachinko game machine PY1 further includes a launching device 72 (shooting means) capable of executing the operation of shooting game balls, and when the unlocking detection sensor 302a does not detect the release of the closing, the launching device 72 is When the ball shooting action is held to be executable and the release of the closing is detected by the unlocking detection sensor 302a, the shooting device 72 is held to be unable to shoot the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent the game balls from jumping out of the pachinko game machine PY1.

In addition, the pachinko machine PY1 is provided with input/output ports having a plurality of terminals (upper frame lamp input/output port 162a, lower frame lamp input/output port 163a, board movable device input/output port 164a, effect button input/output port 163a). A game machine having a board (upper frame lamp driver board 162, lower frame lamp driver board 163, production button relay board 165) on which an output port 165a) is mounted, and one of a plurality of terminals An address associated with the input/output port is set by a plurality of terminals of the unit, and the address includes specific unique information (manufacturer identification information) representing a predetermined attribute. Therefore, by specifying the attribute of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 using the board on which the input/output port is mounted, it is possible to check whether the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is fraudulent or not. can be prevented from being disadvantaged. Moreover, since the predetermined attribute is the company that manufactured the pachinko game machine PY1, there is an advantage that the manufacturing company can easily develop the machine.

Furthermore, the pachinko game machine PY1 further includes a game board 1, a front door 23 supported to be openable and closable with respect to the game board 1, and an effect control board 120 (control means). Board 162, lower frame lamp driver board 163, effect button relay board 165) are installed in front door 23, effect control board 120 is installed in game board 1, effect control board 120 shows a predetermined attribute. Basic unique information (manufacturer identification information) is stored, and the effect control board 120, when the predetermined attribute represented by the basic unique information and the predetermined attribute represented by the specific unique information are different, the game board 1 and the front door 23 is not matched (the combination of the front door 23 with respect to the game board 1 is incompatible). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the problem that the front door 23 on which the performance device is mounted is wrongly attached to the game board 1.例文帳に追加This is particularly effective when, for example, there are various manufacturers of the game board 1, but the manufacturer of the front door 23 is different from and common to the manufacturer of the game board 1. In addition, in the pachinko game machine PY1, a plurality of substrates (upper frame lamp driver substrate 162, lower frame lamp driver substrate 163, effect button relay substrate 165) are mounted, and specific unique information and each Since individual information (device identification information) associated with the substrate is included, the substrates can be easily identified from each other by the address.

In addition, the pachinko machine PY1 includes a launching device (shooting device 72) that shoots game balls, control related to shooting of game balls by the launching device, and predetermined matters other than shooting of game balls (number of balls held, fraud notification, etc.). and a control means (frame control board 180) for performing control related to, the control means is capable of executing unit control (unit firing control) related to one game ball firing at a predetermined cycle (600 msec), The unit control consists of shooting a game ball and waiting for shooting in which the game ball is not shot until the next game ball is shot after the shooting. Therefore, the control means for controlling the shooting of the game balls is generalized, the space of the control means for shooting the game balls can be saved, the cost can be reduced, and the number of game balls shot per unit time can be reduced. can be properly adjusted. Furthermore, in the pachinko game machine PY1, when the unit control ends, there is a case where a launch delay (shooting cycle change control) in which the game ball is not launched, which is different from the launch standby, is executed. The number of shot game balls can be adjusted more appropriately. Moreover, since the time related to the launch delay (fire cycle change control) is shorter than the time related to the predetermined cycle related to the unit control, the number of game balls fired per unit time decreases and the game parlor suffers a disadvantage. can be prevented.

In addition, in the pachinko machine PY1, control can be executed at a predetermined minimum time interval (every 4 msec), and the time (4 msec) related to the launch delay (fire cycle change control) and the predetermined cycle related to unit control This time (600 milliseconds) can be divided by the time interval (minimum time interval) of the control, so that the frame control board 180 can easily control the shooting of game balls.

Furthermore, in the pachinko game machine PY1, the frame control board 180 can periodically (every 2404 milliseconds) execute specific control (unit launch control) relating to multiple launches of game balls, and in each specific control, at least Two or more first times (4 times) of unit control and second times (1 time) of firing delay (fire cycle change control) are included. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the control by the frame control board 180 to properly perform the number of shot game balls per unit time. In addition, the pachinko game machine PY1 further includes an operation means (shooting handle 72k) capable of receiving a specific operation (rotating operation) for shooting a game ball, and the shooting device shoots a game ball in response to the specific operation received by the operation means. The control means can periodically execute the specific control on condition that the specific operation is accepted. Therefore, even when the player performs an operation related to shooting, the number of game balls shot per unit time can be easily and properly adjusted.

Further, the pachinko game machine PY1 includes a launcher 72 for shooting game balls, and a frame control board 180 (control means) for controlling predetermined matters including shooting of game balls by the launcher 72. 180 can execute control at 4 ms intervals (predetermined time intervals), and four (n ) to fire the game ball from the launcher 72 (specific unit firing control), and between a certain unit firing control and the next unit firing control, 1 (1 or more (second integer) is multiplied by 4 ms (second specific period). Therefore, by controlling the frame control board 180, it is possible to appropriately adjust the number of shot game balls per unit time.

(Modified example of the first embodiment)
Next, a modified example of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the first embodiment will be described. It should be noted that it is also possible to appropriately combine the modification examples described below.

In the first embodiment, the frame control side timer interrupt processing (S5005) is executed in a cycle of 4 milliseconds, but the time period related to this cycle is not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate. Therefore, even if the frame control side timer interrupt processing (S5005) is executed with a period shorter than a 4 ms period such as a 1 ms period or a 2 ms period, it will be faster than a 4 ms period such as a 6 ms period or a 10 ms period. It may be executed in a long period of time. Further, regarding the control related to the shooting of the game ball according to the first embodiment, specifically, the unit shooting control and the unit shooting control may be appropriately changed. Also, the number of game balls shot per unit time may be changed as appropriate.

For example, when the frame control side timer interrupt processing is performed at a period of 4 msec, unit firing control is performed to fire one game ball at 600 msec, unit firing control is composed of unit firing control of one time, and unit firing is performed. The time interval between controls may be set to 4 milliseconds, and the number of game balls shot per unit time may be about 99.338. In addition, when frame control side timer interrupt processing is performed at a cycle of 4 msec, unit firing control is performed to fire one game ball in 600 msec, unit firing control is configured with 16 unit firing controls, and the unit In the firing control, a time zone not constituting unit firing control is secured for 12 milliseconds, in other words, a firing delay (fire cycle change control) after unit firing control is performed three times, and game balls are fired per unit time. The number may be approximately 99.875. In this case, the assignment of the three firing delays (firing cycle change control) in the unit firing control may be appropriately set. For example, one launch delay (firing cycle change control) is performed in the fifth unit launch control, the tenth unit launch control, and the sixteenth unit launch control. ) may be arranged as evenly as possible. Alternatively, three firing delays (firing cycle change control) may be continuously performed in the 16th unit firing control, and the firing delays (firing cycle changing control) may be collectively arranged in the unit firing control. .

In addition, frame control side timer interrupt processing is performed at a cycle of 2 msec, unit firing control is performed to fire one game ball at 600 msec, unit firing control is configured by unit firing control twice, and unit firing control is performed. is set to 2 milliseconds, and the number of game balls shot per unit time is about 99.834. In addition, frame control side timer interrupt processing is performed at a cycle of 2 msec, unit firing control is performed to fire one game ball at 600 msec, unit firing control is configured by unit firing control of 8 times, and the unit firing control is performed. , a time period not constituting unit firing control is secured for 6 ms, in other words, a firing delay (fire cycle change control) after unit firing control is performed three times, and the number of game balls fired per unit time is It may be approximately 99.875. In this case, the assignment of the three firing delays (firing cycle change control) in the unit firing control may be appropriately set. For example, one launch delay (firing cycle change control) is performed in the second unit launch control, the fifth unit launch control, and the eighth unit launch control, and the launch delay (firing cycle change control ) may be arranged as evenly as possible. Alternatively, the eighth unit firing control may be followed by three firing delays (firing cycle change control), and the firing delays (firing cycle changing control) may be collectively arranged in the unit firing control. .

In addition, in the first embodiment, in the frame control board 180, the frame control side ball-handling number BU section 186 is formed in the frame control RAM 184 including the ball-handling number storage section 185. It may be formed in a storage device (component, electronic medium) different from that. Further, in the first embodiment, the frame control-side number-of-balls-held-bu section 186 has a first number-of-handed-balls BU area 186a, a second number-of-held-balls BU area 186b, and a third-number-of-held-balls BU area 186c. Although one backup data representing the number of held balls is stored, the number of backup data representing the number of held balls to be stored is not limited to three and may be appropriately changed.

In the first embodiment, the number of possession balls represented by the first frame control side number BU data, the number of possession balls represented by the second frame control side number BU data, and the third frame control side number BU When all of the number of held balls represented by the data match, it is determined that the backup data representing the number of held balls in the frame control board 180 is normal. , and may be changed as appropriate. For example, if the number of held balls indicated by the backup data representing the number of held balls in the frame control board 180 matches at a predetermined ratio of more than half or more than half, such as 2/3 or more, the number of held balls in the frame control board 180 may be determined to be normal. In this case, the number of balls held that matches at a predetermined ratio of half or more may be restored as the number of balls held master data (newly stored in the number of held balls storage unit 185).

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, when it is determined that the checksum values do not match, in other words, an abnormality has occurred in the frame control RAM 184, in the power-on process (S5001) of the frame control main process, the frame control side The number of balls held master data is restored using the number of balls BU data (newly stored in the number of held balls storage unit 185), but the frame control board 180 is provided with the number of held balls BU unit 186 on the frame control side. First, the frame control side possession ball number BU data is not stored, and from the beginning, either one or both of the game control side possession ball number BU data and the display device side possession ball number BU data is used to master the number of possession balls. The data may be restored (newly stored in the number of balls held storage unit 185). When either one is used, the number of possession balls represented by the number of possession balls BU data may be restored as the number of possession balls master data (newly stored in the number of possession balls storage unit 185). On the other hand, when both are used, it is determined whether or not the number of held balls represented by the game control side number of held balls BU data and the number of held balls represented by the display device side number of held balls BU data match. Then, those values may be regarded as normal, and the matching number of balls held may be restored (newly stored in the number of held balls storage unit 185) as master data of the number of held balls.

In the first embodiment, the number of possession balls represented by the first frame control side number BU data, the number of possession balls represented by the second frame control side number BU data, and the third frame control side number BU When it is determined that the frame control side possession ball number BU unit 186 is abnormal because the number of possession balls represented by the data does not all match, the game is not being played and the first effect button 40k is pressed to the first effect button 40k. When the condition of receiving one specific operation (for example, a long press operation for 5 seconds) is established, the number of held balls is displayed on the display section 50a. However, this condition can be changed as appropriate. For example, when a game is not being played, a menu screen showing various setting items such as sound volume and light intensity is displayed. The number of balls held may be displayed on the display section 50a on condition that an operation is performed. Also, regardless of whether or not the first effect button 40k is operated, the number of held balls may be displayed on the display section 50a under the condition that no game is played. Alternatively, the number of held balls may be displayed on the display section 50a on condition that the first effect button 40k receives the first specific operation regardless of whether or not the game is executed. Furthermore, the content of the first specifying operation may be changed as appropriate.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the number of held balls is displayed on the display unit 50a, the first effect button 40k receives the second specific operation (for example, normal one-time pressing operation), thereby displaying The number of balls held is erased in the portion 50a, but the content of the second specifying operation may be changed as appropriate. Alternatively, after the number of held balls is displayed on the display section 50a, the number of held balls is erased when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the display regardless of whether or not the first effect button 40k is operated. You can do it. Also, the number of held balls may continue to be displayed until the game is started.

Further, in the first embodiment, the pitch display device 301 displays the pitch number on the pitch display 301b when the pitch display button 301k is operated. The number of held balls may continue to be displayed after power is supplied without being mounted.

In addition, in the first embodiment, in response to updating the number of owned balls master data, frame control side number of owned balls BU data, game control side number of owned balls BU data, and display device side number of owned balls BU data are also Although it is updated, this update timing may be changed as appropriate. For example, every time frame control side timer interrupt processing is performed, frame control side ball number backup processing, game control side ball number backup processing, and display device side backup processing are executed, and various ball number BU data are updated. You can let it be.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, a game ball made of steel that sticks to a magnet is mixed based on a discharge ball detection signal from a discharge ball detection sensor 310a installed in a collection passage formed outside the game area 6. Although it is determined whether or not there is a steel game ball that sticks to a magnet, the installation position of the detection sensor for determining whether or not it is mixed may be changed as appropriate. For example, a steel game ball that sticks to a magnet and a detection sensor that detects a stainless steel game ball are installed in the shooting area 7, and the steel game ball sticks to the magnet based on the detection signal output from the detection sensor. You may make it judge whether it is mixed. In addition, the specific time of the illegally designated time, which is the reference value (threshold value) for determining whether or not a game ball made of steel that sticks to a magnet is mixed, is also included in the first embodiment. It is not limited and may be changed as appropriate.

In addition, the pachinko game machine PY1 is equipped with an entry prevention device 76. The shape, operation mode, and installation location of the entry prevention movable portion 76k that constitutes the entry prevention device 76 are such that the entry prevention movable portion 76k is in the standby state. It may be changed as appropriate within a range that allows the game ball to pass through without hindrance and prevents the game ball moving toward the game area 6 from entering the game area 6 in the activated state. For example, a rectangular plate-like entry blocking movable portion 76k is arranged so that its surface is flush with the launching area 7 in the standby state and the long side direction is parallel to the moving direction of the game ball, and is in the operating state. Then, the end on the side of the shooting device 72 may be used as a rotation axis, and the tip on the side of the game area 6 may be configured to rotate so as to rise.

Furthermore, a portion (for example, about 1 to 2 cm) of the outer rail 62 that partitions the firing area 7 is composed of a movable portion made of another part while maintaining the shape of that portion, and the movable portion is operated. In this state, the end on the side of the shooting device 72 may be used as a rotation axis, and the tip on the side of the play area 6 may be configured to rotate so as to tilt toward the inner rail 63 side. Alternatively, a portion (for example, about 1 to 2 cm) of the inner rail 63 that partitions the firing area 7 is composed of a movable portion made of another part while maintaining the shape of that portion, and the movable portion is in an operating state. In this case, the end on the side of the shooting device 72 may be used as a rotation axis, and the tip on the side of the game area 6 may be configured to rotate so as to tilt toward the outer rail 62 side.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the entry blocking movable portion 76k is arranged at the end of the launch area 7 on the side of the game area 6, in other words, near the boundary between the game area 6 and the launch area 7 in the launch area 7. , the range from the foul ball collection port in the shooting area 7 to the game area 6 side may be changed as appropriate. For example, the entry blocking movable portion 76k may be arranged around the center of the portion of the shooting area 7 formed on the game board 1 along the moving direction of the game ball. Alternatively, the entrance blocking movable portion 76k may be arranged near the boundary between the inner frame 22 and the game board 1, in other words, at the end on the side of the game area 6, which is the part formed in the inner frame 22 of the shooting area 7. .

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the entry blocking movable portion 76k switches from the standby state to the operating state when the front door 23 is opened, and prevents the game balls moving toward the game area 6 from passing through. This timing may be appropriately changed within a range where it is possible to prevent the game ball moving toward the game area 6 from passing. For example, even if the front door 23 is not open, the entry blocking movable portion 76k may be switched from the standby state to the operating state when the lock 302 is unlocked. Alternatively, even if the front door 23 is not opened, the entry blocking movable portion 76k may be switched from the standby state to the operating state when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has passed since the lock 302 was unlocked. good.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, when the lock 302 is unlocked, the shooting of the game ball by the shooting device 72 is prohibited. It may be changed appropriately as long as it is possible to prevent the moving game ball from coming out of the pachinko game machine PY1. For example, when the front door 23 is opened, the shooting of game balls by the shooting device 72 may be prohibited. Alternatively, the launching of the game ball by the shooting device 72 may be prohibited when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed after the lock 302 was unlocked. In addition, in the first embodiment, the frame control microcomputer 181 turns on the firing prohibition flag, and while the firing prohibition flag is ON, the process of executing the firing of the game ball (S5409) is prevented from reaching the game. Although the shooting of the ball is prohibited, the method of prohibiting this prohibition can be changed as appropriate. For example, the detection signal from the touch switch 72a and the detection signal from the shooting volume knob 72b are invalidated or cannot be input. By doing so, it is possible to prohibit the shooting of game balls. Alternatively, the firing handle 72k may be fixed at the initial position, or the firing device 72 may be deactivated to prohibit the firing of game balls.

Further, in the first embodiment, the game board 1 and the Although it is determined whether or not it is matched with the front door 23, any one of the input/output port 162a for the upper frame lamp, the input/output port 163a for the lower frame lamp, and the input/output port 165a for the effect button Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not the game board 1 and the front door 23 are matched based on the manufacturer identification information set in any two of them. However, if a single manufacturer identification information is used for determination, there is a possibility that the input/output port alone is faulty, so it is preferable that there are at least two input/output ports for determination. Furthermore, from the viewpoint of improving the accuracy of determining whether the input/output port is out of order or the game board 1 and the front door 23 are not aligned, it is preferable to increase the number of input/output ports involved in the determination.

Further, the front door 23 is equipped with a board for controlling the speaker 52 attached to the front door 23, and address information including manufacturer identification information and device information is set in the input/output port of the board. , in place of one or two of the input/output port 162a for the upper frame lamp, the input/output port 163a for the lower frame lamp, and the input/output port 165a for the effect button, or the input/output port 162a for the upper frame lamp, the lower In addition to the input/output port 163a for the frame lamp and the input/output port 165a for the effect button, the input/output port related to the speaker 52 is also used to determine whether or not the game board 1 and the front door 23 are matched. You can do it.

In addition, an effect device different from the speaker 52, the upper frame lamp 53U, the lower frame lamp 53D, and the first effect button 40k such as a movable device that can operate like the board movable device 55 is attached to the front door 23, and the effect device Address information including manufacturer identification information and device information is set in the input/output ports mounted on the board to be controlled, and the input/output port 162a for the upper frame lamp, the input/output port 163a for the lower frame lamp, and the effect button. instead of any one or two of the input/output ports 165a, or in addition to the input/output port 162a for the upper frame lamp, the input/output port 163a for the lower frame lamp, and the input/output port 165a for the effect button, It may be determined whether or not the game board 1 and the front door 23 are matched using an input/output port related to the device.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the address information set in the input/output ports 162a, 163a, and 165a includes manufacturer identification information for determining whether or not the game board 1 and the front door 23 are matched. However, instead of or in addition to the manufacturer identification information that identifies the manufacturer, identification information that identifies the model (model identification information) or identification information that identifies the series related to the model (model series identification information) It may be included in the address information. In this way, by including the model identification information and the model series identification information in the address information, it is determined whether or not the game board 1 and the front door 23 are matched even for the pachinko game machines related to the same manufacturer. can do.

Further, in the first embodiment, the controller 128 is mounted as a component separate from the effect control microcomputer 121 in the effect control board 120, but may be configured to be built in the effect control microcomputer 121. Furthermore, although the controller 128 and various input/output ports 162a, 163a, 164a, and 165a are connected by serial communication, they may be connected by parallel communication. Further, in the first embodiment, the various input/output ports 162a, 163a, 164a, and 165a transmit ACK to the controller 128 when receiving data, but the specifications may be such that they do not transmit. In this case, controller 128 may be configured to detect transmission errors in a predetermined manner.

<Second embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment according to the invention will be described. In the following, as the second embodiment, mainly the basic embodiment and the points different from the first embodiment will be described. Also, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the basic embodiment and the same configuration as the first embodiment, or for the configuration similarly corresponding to that of the first embodiment.

FIG. 64 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the game control board 100 and the frame control board 180 according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 64, the pachinko game machine PY2 of the second embodiment includes a fraudulent ball detection sensor as a sensor that directly detects a game ball that contains more iron than a stainless steel game ball and is attracted to a magnet. 313a is installed. As described above, there are cases where fraud is committed using a game ball containing more iron than stainless steel, but the fraudulent ball detection sensor 313a does not detect a stainless steel game ball. Also contains a large amount of iron, and is configured to be able to detect game balls that are attracted to magnets. In the following, a game ball that contains more iron than a stainless steel game ball and is attracted to a magnet is referred to as an "illegal ball".

The illegal ball detection sensor 313a is provided near the downstream side of the discharged ball detection sensor 310a in a recovery passage (not shown). When detecting an illegal ball, the illegal ball detection sensor 313a outputs a signal (illegal ball detection signal) indicating detection of an illegal ball to the frame control board 180 .

Next, frame control side timer interrupt processing (S5005) according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing an example of frame control side timer interrupt processing. As shown in FIG. 65, in steps S5201 to S5208, the same subroutine processing as in the first embodiment is performed. However, as will be described later, the control content of the fraud detection process in step S5206 differs from that of the first embodiment.

Then, in the second embodiment, in step S5209, a difference pitch management process, which is not performed in the first embodiment, is performed. The difference ball number management process manages the difference (number of difference balls) between the number of game balls that have entered the game area 6 (number of incoming balls) and the number of game balls that have been discharged from the game area 6 (number of discharged balls). This is a process for It should be noted that the other processing of step S5210 in the second embodiment has the same control contents as the other processing of step S5209 in the first embodiment.

Next, the fraud detection process (S5206) according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing an example of fraud detection processing (S5206). As shown in FIG. 66, in the fraud detection process (S5206), the frame control microcomputer 181 first determines whether or not there is an illegal ball. (S5601).

If the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that there is no illegal ball (NO in S5601), it ends the fraud detection processing (S5206) as it is, and if it determines that there is an illegal ball (YES in S5601), it performs the steps described above in step S5602. Similarly, the fraud notification is performed, and the fraud detection processing (S5206) ends. The content of the fraud notification effect can be appropriately set within a range in which it is possible to recognize that fraud has occurred, but in the second embodiment, the configuration is the same as in the first embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the discharge ball detection sensor 310a is provided in the collection passage. It was necessary to detect the illegal ball by the control related to the illegal detection process (FIG. 58). However, in the second embodiment, since the illegal ball detection sensor 313a that detects illegal balls without detecting stainless steel game balls is provided in the recovery path, whether or not the illegal ball detection sensor 313a detects It is possible to directly determine whether or not an illegal ball exists.

Next, the difference pitch management process (S5209) according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing an example of the difference pitch management process (S5209). In addition, the number-of-balls storage unit 185 is provided with a number-of-balls-difference counter for counting the number of difference-balls, and the production control microcomputer 121 manages the number of difference-balls using the number-of-difference-balls counter. Therefore, if no fraud has been committed, the counter value of the difference pitch counter indicates the difference pitch number at that time. In addition, the number of difference balls indicates "+" when the number of entering balls is greater than the number of ejected balls, and "-" when the number of entered balls is less than the number of ejected balls. show.

As shown in FIG. 65, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not there is a shot ball in step S5901 in the difference ball number management process (S5209). As described above, when a shot ball is generated, the shot ball detection sensor 311 a outputs a shot ball detection signal to the frame control board 180 . Therefore, the frame control microcomputer 181 determines in step S5901 whether or not a shot ball detection signal has been input.

If the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that there is no shot ball (NO in S5901), it proceeds to step S5903. by adding "1" to the number of difference balls to be managed, and the process proceeds to step S5903. The reason why "1" is added to the difference number of balls when it is determined that there is a shot ball is that the game ball may enter the game area 6 when the game ball is shot.

The effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not there is a foul ball in step S5903. As described above, when a foul ball is generated, the foul ball detection sensor 312 a outputs a foul ball detection signal to the frame control board 180 . Therefore, the frame control microcomputer 181 determines in step S5903 whether or not a foul ball detection signal has been input.

If the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that there is no foul ball (NO at S5903), it proceeds to step S5905. is subtracted by "1" from the number of difference balls to be managed, and the process proceeds to step S5905. The reason why the number of difference balls is subtracted by "1" when it is determined that there is a foul ball is that the number of difference balls is added by "1" due to the shooting of the game ball, but the ball is fouled without entering the game area 6. This is because it is necessary to cancel the addition of "1" since it has been recovered as a sphere.

The effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not there is a discharge ball in step S5905. As described above, when a discharged ball is generated, the discharged ball detection sensor 310 a outputs a discharged ball detection signal to the frame control board 180 . Therefore, in step S5905, the frame control microcomputer 181 determines whether or not the discharged ball detection signal has been input.

If the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that there is no ejected ball (NO at S5905), it proceeds to step S5907. is subtracted by "1" from the number of difference balls to be managed, and the process proceeds to step S5907. The reason why it is determined that there is a discharged ball and the number of difference balls is subtracted by "1" is that the game ball that has entered the game area 6 has been discharged from the game area 6. - 特許庁

The effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not there is an illegal ball in step S5907. As described above, when an illegal ball is generated, the illegal ball detection sensor 313 a outputs an illegal ball detection signal to the frame control board 180 . Therefore, in step S5907, the frame control microcomputer 181 determines whether or not an illegal ball detection signal has been input.

If the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that there is no illegal ball (NO at S5907), it proceeds to step S5909. by adding "1" to the number of difference balls to be managed, and the process proceeds to step S5909. It is determined that there is an illegal ball and the number of difference balls is incremented by "1". This is to cancel out the number of balls that have been thrown into the pachinko game machine PY2 and counted as discharged balls.

The effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the number of difference balls is greater than a predetermined excess threshold value (for example, +30) in step S5909. A predetermined excess threshold value (for example, +30) indicates that the game ball can remain in the game area 6 when the game ball that has entered the game area 6 is normally ejected from the game area 6 while the game ball continues to be shot normally. It is set to a value that moderately exceeds the number of game balls, and can be set as appropriate within a range that can appropriately indicate this. The fact that the number of difference balls exceeds a predetermined excessive threshold value means that a large number of game balls are stuck in a nail or the like, or that the front door 23 is opened and the game balls go out of the pachinko machine PY2. It is assumed that a situation has occurred in which the number of people who left did not come back.

When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the number of difference balls does not exceed the predetermined excessive threshold value (NO in S5909), the processing for managing the number of difference balls (S5209) is finished as it is, and the process proceeds to the frame control side timer interrupt processing (S5005). Returning, when it is determined that the difference in the number of balls exceeds the predetermined excessive threshold (YES in S5909), in step S5910, an abnormal number of difference in balls is notified that the difference in the number of balls is abnormal (abnormal difference in the number of balls). After performing the above, the difference ball number management process (S5209) is finished, and the process returns to the frame control side timer interrupt process (S5005).

The notification of the abnormal ball count difference in step S5910 is performed by displaying an image indicating that the abnormal ball count has occurred on the display section 50a. Since the frame control board 180 and the effect control board 120 are not directly connected, the frame control board 180 displays an image (ball difference anomaly notification image) indicating that the difference ball number abnormality has occurred on the display unit 50a. (execution of difference ball number abnormality notification) is set in the output buffer of the frame control RAM 184 . The difference ball number abnormality notification request command set in the output buffer is transmitted to the game control board 100 by output processing (S5003). When the game control microcomputer 101 receives the difference ball number abnormality notification request command, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits to the effect control board 120 a difference ball number abnormality notification designation command for designating execution of the difference ball number abnormality notification. When the performance control microcomputer 121 receives the differential ball number abnormality notification designation command, it transmits a command (differential ball number abnormality notification start command) to the image control board 140 to indicate that the difference ball number abnormality notification is to be executed.

When the image control board 140 receives the start command of the abnormal ball count notification, the image control board 140 displays the abnormal ball count notification image on the display unit 50a for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). It should be noted that the specific display contents of the error notice image for the difference in the number of balls can be appropriately set within a range in which it is possible to recognize that the abnormality in the difference in the number of balls has occurred. It consists of an explanatory text "There is an error in the number of balls. Please cancel."

As described above, the pachinko game machine PY2 is a game machine in which a game is played by causing stainless steel game balls to flow down to the game area 6, and detects steel game balls sticking to magnets. An illegal ball detection sensor 313a (specific detection sensor) that does not detect game balls and a frame control board 180 (control means) are provided. is output to the frame control board 180, and the frame control board 180 can execute illegal notification (specific notification) based on the input of the illegal ball detection signal. Therefore, basically, in a specification in which a game is played by letting stainless steel game balls flow down to the game area 6, the amusement arcade side is notified by simple control that steel game balls that stick to magnets are mixed. can do. In addition, the pachinko game machine PY2 further includes a discharge ball detection sensor 310a (non-specific detection sensor) that detects a steel game ball that sticks to a magnet and a stainless steel game ball. When a sticky steel game ball or a stainless steel game ball is detected, a discharge ball detection signal (non-specific detection signal) indicating the detection is output to the frame control board 180, and the frame control board 180 detects the discharge ball. Based on the input of the signal, it is possible to control the number of difference balls (predetermined matters regarding game balls). Therefore, while monitoring the inclusion of steel game balls that stick to magnets, it is possible to control predetermined matters regarding game balls, specifically, the number of difference balls, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine PY2, the illegal ball detection sensor 313a and the discharge ball detection sensor 310a are attached in close proximity in the vicinity of a specific location through which the game ball can pass, so that the steel magnet can accurately stick to the magnet. While monitoring that game balls are mixed in, it is also possible to control predetermined matters regarding game balls, specifically the number of difference balls. Moreover, since the specific part is located in the collection path formed outside the game area 6 through which the game balls that have entered the game area 6 can be collected and pass through, the steel game balls can more accurately stick to the magnets. Predetermined items related to game balls, specifically, control related to the number of difference balls can be executed while monitoring that the game balls are mixed. Furthermore, since the fraud notification is a notification indicating that a steel game ball sticking to a magnet has been detected, the store clerk can easily understand that a steel game ball sticking to a magnet has been detected. can be done.

(Modified example of the second embodiment)
Next, a modified example of the pachinko game machine PY2 according to the second embodiment will be described. It should be noted that it is also possible to appropriately combine the modification examples described below.

In the second embodiment, based on the illegal ball detection signal from the illegal ball detection sensor 313a installed in the recovery passage formed outside the game area 6, whether or not a steel game ball that sticks to the magnet is mixed. However, the installation position of the detection sensor for determining whether or not a steel game ball that sticks to a magnet is mixed may be changed as appropriate. For example, an illegal ball detection sensor 313a that detects a steel game ball that sticks to a magnet but does not detect a stainless steel game ball may be installed in the shooting area 7 .

Further, in the second embodiment, the discharge ball detection sensor 310a is installed in the collection passage, but the pachinko game machine PY2 may be configured without the discharge ball detection sensor 310a. Furthermore, in the second embodiment, control and management regarding the number of difference balls is performed based on the number of discharged balls detection sensor 310a. It is also possible to control and manage predetermined matters related to the game ball. Here, when the discharge ball detection sensor 310a detects an illegal ball, a problem or trouble occurs in the control and management of predetermined matters related to the game ball. can be corrected, the frame control microcomputer 181 may appropriately perform processing for correcting the problem or trouble based on the illegal ball detection signal.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the ejected ball detection sensor 310a and the illegal ball detection sensor 313a are attached in close proximity, but are not in close proximity and are separated to some extent (for example, separated by about 5 to 10 cm). state).

Further, in the pachinko game machine PY2, the number of difference balls is counted. There is a possibility that as many illegal balls as that number have flowed into the pachinko gaming machine PY2. Therefore, the number of difference pitches may be displayed on the unit display device 300 or the display section 50a. By configuring in this way, it is possible to confirm that the fraudulent flow of illegal balls into the pachinko game machine PY2 has been carried out. Furthermore, by combining the number of difference balls displayed on the unit display device 300 or the display section 50a and the presence or absence of fraud notification, it is possible to more accurately make fraudulent balls flow into the pachinko game machine PY2. It is possible to make a judgment as to whether or not the

(Modified example common to the first embodiment and the second embodiment)
Next, a modified example common to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the first embodiment and the pachinko gaming machine PY2 according to the second embodiment will be described. It should be noted that it is also possible to appropriately combine the modification examples described below. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 and the pachinko gaming machine PY2 are referred to as "pachinko gaming machine PY1 and the like".

The pachinko game machine PY1 and the like are constituted by enclosed type game machines, but may be constituted by a game machine in which a player can touch game balls like the pachinko game machine PY according to the basic embodiment. . In particular, the frame control microcomputer 181 is the same as in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, even in the case of a game machine such as a pachinko game machine PY in which a player can touch game balls. As in the case, frame control main processing, power-on processing (S5001), and frame control side timer interrupt processing (S5005) can be executed.

Further, the pachinko machine PY1 or the like counts (controls and manages) the number of held balls based on launched balls and foul balls, but does not count (control and manage) the number of held balls based on discharged balls. Also good. In this case, the frame control microcomputer 181 subtracts "1" from the number of held balls when the discharged ball is detected.

Furthermore, in the pachinko game machine PY1 or the like, by operating the ball number display button 301k, the number of balls held at that time is displayed on the ball number display device 301b. Basically, the number of balls in possession at that time may be displayed on the number of balls in possession display 301b. Alternatively or additionally, the number of balls held may be displayed in a predetermined area of the display section 50a. The conditions for displaying the number of balls held in this case can be set as appropriate. The number of balls held may be displayed accordingly. Furthermore, the number of balls held may be displayed on the unit display device 300 . The conditions for displaying the number of balls held in this case can be set as appropriate. good.

In the pachinko machine PY1, etc., stainless steel game balls that do not stick to magnets are basically used. game balls may be used.

8. Other Modification Examples Next, other modification examples of the pachinko gaming machine PY according to the basic embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the first embodiment, and the pachinko gaming machine PY2 according to the second embodiment are described below. explain. Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine PY, the pachinko gaming machine PY1, and the pachinko gaming machine PY2 are referred to as "pachinko gaming machine PY, etc.".

In the pachinko game machine PY or the like, the display unit 50a is used to variably display the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in order to notify the result of the special drawing lottery. (Slot machine)”, a special figure lottery result may be notified by arranging a drum on which a pattern is displayed and by variably displaying the drum.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine PY, etc., the big winning opening 14 can be opened in the big winning game, but a winning area that can be opened in the big winning game may be provided in addition to the big winning opening 14 .

Further, in the pachinko game machine PY, etc., when a specific jackpot symbol type is determined, the game always progresses in a high-probability state after the jackpot game. That is, the setting of the high probability state is associated with the jackpot symbol type. However, the setting conditions for the high-probability state may be changed. For example, in addition to the big winning device 14D, a second big winning device that can be opened and closed and into which game balls can enter when opened is provided at a position where the game balls can reach in the game area 6, and a second big winning device is provided at a position where the game balls can reach. In a predetermined round game, when the game ball that has entered the second big winning device by opening the second big winning device passes through a specific area provided on the downstream side thereof, a high probability state occurs with the end of the big winning game. may be set.

In this case, for example, a specific jackpot pattern (jackpot pattern that makes it easy to set a high probability state) that the second big winning device opens for an easy time (for example, 29.5 seconds), and the second big winning device A non-specific jackpot pattern (jackpot pattern that makes it difficult to set a high probability state) that opens for a difficult time (for example, 0.5 seconds) can be provided. In addition, there are a specific area and a non-specific area as areas through which the winning game balls can pass, and a distribution device for distributing the game balls to the specific area and the non-specific area is provided. Although the opening time of the second big prize device is the same, the combination of the opening mode of the second big prize device and the operation mode of the sorting device makes it easy to set the high probability state and the high probability state. It is also possible to provide a jackpot pattern that is difficult to set.

Further, in the pachinko game machine PY or the like, the game control board 100 performs basic control relating to the progress of the game, and the performance control board 100 performs basic control relating to the progress of the presentation according to the progress of the game (game control). As shown by 120, the control of the game and the control of the presentation are performed by different substrates, but they may be configured to be performed by one substrate. In this case, the image control board 140 may be included in the one board, or may be provided separately from the one board.

In addition, the game machine of the present invention can be applied to other pinball game machines such as arrange ball machines and mammoth ball game machines, reel-type game machines (so-called "slot machines"), and the like.

8. Inventions Disclosed in the Aforedescribed Embodiments The following Inventions A to K are disclosed up to the preceding paragraph in this [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention]. In the explanations of the inventions A to K, the names and expressions of the corresponding configurations in the embodiments of the invention described above and the reference numerals used in the drawings are added in parentheses for reference. However, the elements such as the means constituting each invention are not limited to this appendix. Invention A is a generic term for the following inventions A1 to A6, Invention B is a generic term for the following inventions B1 to B5, Invention C is a generic term for the following inventions C1 to C4, and Invention D is a generic term for the following inventions C1 to C4. , the following inventions D1 to D4, invention E is the following inventions E1 to E3, invention F is the following inventions F1 to F5, and invention G is the following invention G1 Invention H is a generic term for Inventions H1 to H4 below, Invention I is a generic term for Inventions I1 to I3 below, and Invention J is a generic term for Inventions J1 to J2 below. and invention K is a general term for inventions K1 to K5 below.

In addition, according to Invention A, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2019-181256 achieves space saving and cost reduction for the control means that shoots game balls in response to Problem 1 described below. It has the effect of being able to In the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-181256, game balls are shot toward a game area at a predetermined cycle by a shooting control board dedicated to a shooting device that shoots game balls. However, when mounting a dedicated launch control board for launching game balls, it is necessary to secure an installation location for the board. In addition, the number of necessary parts such as a harness for connection increases, resulting in increased costs. Therefore, the first problem is to provide a game machine capable of reducing the cost while achieving space saving for control means for shooting game balls.

Further, according to the inventions B and C, when the stored data becomes abnormal, the data can be restored. In the gaming machine described in JP-A-2019-181256, a microcomputer including processing measures such as a CPU (Central Processing Unit) that executes predetermined control and a storage device such as a RAM (Random Access Memory) that stores data. is installed. However, the microcomputer may be initialized or damaged due to some influence. As a result, the data stored in the microcomputer may become abnormal. Therefore, the second problem is to provide a game machine capable of restoring the data when the stored data becomes abnormal.

Further, according to the inventions D and E, the gaming machine described in JP-A-2013-192613 solves the following problem 3 by increasing the number of game balls (the number of balls held) that can be used in a game. It is possible to recognize the number of balls held when an abnormality occurs in the control device that electronically manages the ball. In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-192613, there are cases where the number of held balls is electronically managed. However, if an abnormality occurs in the control device that electronically manages the number of balls held, and the actual number of balls held becomes unknown, the player will suffer a loss. Therefore, the third problem is to provide a gaming machine capable of recognizing the number of game balls when an abnormality occurs in a control device that electronically manages the number of owned balls.

Further, according to the inventions F and G, the gaming machine described in JP-A-2017-209224 can detect game balls made of legal materials used in the pachinko gaming machine in order to solve the following problem 4. At the same time, there is an effect that a game ball made of steel can also be detected. The game machine described in JP-A-2017-209224 uses steel game balls. However, there is a problem that various frauds using the material of the game ball, such as guiding a game ball made of steel with a magnet to enter a starting hole, have been practiced. Therefore, it is conceivable to change the material of the game ball. However, even if the material of the game ball is changed, it is assumed that there will be fraudulent use of steel game balls mixed into the pachinko game machine. In addition, when playing a game with a pachinko game machine, it is also necessary to detect game balls made of a material other than the regular steel used in the pachinko game machine. Therefore, a fourth problem is to provide a game machine capable of detecting game balls made of a regular material used in the pachinko game machine and also detecting game balls made of steel.

Further, according to invention H, invention I, and invention G, when the front door is opened, the game machine described in JP-A-2013-192613 can be fired when the front door is opened for problem 5 described below. It is possible to prevent the game ball from jumping out. In the gaming machine described in JP-A-2013-192613, the game area into which the launched game balls can enter is arranged inside the pachinko gaming machine. A front door that can be opened and closed is attached to the front side of the game area, and a game is played with the pachinko game machine closed by the front door. When the pachinko game machine is closed by the front door, the game area and the outside are cut off by the front door, so that the shot game balls do not jump outside. However, when the front door is opened for some reason, there is a risk that the shot game ball may fly out and be lost. Therefore, a fifth task is to provide a game machine capable of preventing a shot game ball from jumping out when the front door is opened.

In addition, according to the invention K, regarding the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-192613, with regard to the problem 6 described below, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the installation error of the front door to a certain game board. The gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2013-192613 includes a game board and a front door supported to be openable and closable with respect to the game board. In recent years, generally, the game board and the front door that constitute one pachinko machine are designed and manufactured by the same manufacturer, but the game board and the front door may be designed and manufactured by different manufacturers. Conceivable. As a result, for example, in amusement arcades, there is a possibility that a different model of front door is attached to a certain game board. Even if the game board and the front door are designed and manufactured by the same manufacturer, for example, a different model of front door may be attached to a certain game board in a factory or the like. Therefore, the sixth task is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing the front door from being attached incorrectly to a certain game board.

8-1-1. Invention A1
The game machine according to invention A1 is
A launching device (launching device 72) for shooting game balls;
A control means (frame control board 180) for controlling the shooting of game balls by the shooting device and controlling predetermined matters (number of held balls, etc.) other than the shooting of game balls,
The control means is capable of executing unit control related to one shot of a game ball at a predetermined cycle (600 milliseconds),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the unit control consists of shooting a game ball and waiting for shooting until the next game ball is shot after the shooting.

8-1-2. Invention A2
The gaming machine according to Invention A2 is
A gaming machine according to Invention A1,
The gaming machine according to claim 1,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in accordance with the end of the unit control, a firing cycle change control, different from the firing standby, in which game balls are not fired is executed.

8-1-3. Invention A3
The gaming machine according to invention A3 is
A gaming machine according to Invention A2,
A gaming machine, wherein the time for the firing cycle change control is shorter than the time for the predetermined cycle.

8-1-4. Invention A4
The gaming machine according to Invention A4 is
A gaming machine according to Invention A2 or Invention A3,
The control means is capable of executing control at a predetermined minimum time interval (4 ms),
A game machine, wherein the time related to the firing cycle change control and the time related to the predetermined cycle can be divided by the minimum time interval.

8-1-5. Invention A5
The game machine according to invention A5 is
A gaming machine according to any one of inventions A2 to A4,
The control means can periodically execute specific control (unit launch control) related to launching game balls multiple times,
A gaming machine characterized in that each specific control includes at least two or more first times (four times) of unit control and second times (one time) of firing cycle change control.

8-1-6. Invention A6
The gaming machine according to invention A6 is
A gaming machine according to Invention A5,
It further comprises an operation means (shooting handle 72k) capable of accepting a specific operation (rotating operation) for shooting the game ball,
The shooting device shoots a game ball according to the specific operation received by the operation means,
The game machine, wherein the control means can periodically execute the specific control on condition that the specific operation is accepted.

8-2-1. Invention B1
The game machine according to invention B1 is
In a gaming machine comprising control means (frame control board 180) capable of executing predetermined control and storage means (frame control RAM 184) capable of storing predetermined data,
The storage means includes a first storage unit (ball number storage unit 185) and a second storage unit (frame control side ball number BU unit 185),
The first storage unit stores data representing specific items (number of balls held) as main data (number of balls held master data),
The second storage unit stores a plurality of data representing the specific items as sub data (frame control side ball possession number BU data),
When determining that the storage means is abnormal, the control means determines whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied for the plurality of pieces of sub-data (the number of possession balls indicated by the number of possession balls on the frame control side BU data is all the same). match or not), and when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the main data is newly generated based on the plurality of sub-data and stored in the first storage unit. A game machine characterized by having

8-2-2. Invention B2
The gaming machine according to invention B2 is
A gaming machine according to invention B1,
A gaming machine, wherein the control means determines whether or not the storage means is abnormal when power is supplied to the gaming machine.

8-2-3. Invention B3
The gaming machine according to invention B3 is
A gaming machine according to invention B1 or invention B2,
A gaming machine, wherein the specific item is the number of game media (number of balls held) usable in a game.

8-2-4. Invention B4
The gaming machine according to invention B4 is
A gaming machine according to any one of inventions B1 to B3,
The second storage unit stores three or more pieces of the sub data,
the predetermined condition is that all the contents represented by the sub data match;
The gaming machine, wherein the control means stores, as the main data, data representing contents that match all of the sub data in the first storage section.

8-2-5. Invention B5
The gaming machine according to invention B5 is
A gaming machine according to any one of inventions B1 to B3,
The second storage unit stores three or more pieces of the sub data,
the predetermined condition is that the contents represented by the sub data match in a predetermined number equal to or more than half of the number of the sub data;
The gaming machine, wherein the control means stores, as the main data, in the first storage unit, data representing content that matches a predetermined number, which is equal to or more than half of the number of the sub-data.

8-3-1. Invention C1
The gaming machine according to invention C1 is
Specific control means (frame control means 180) that controls a predetermined item (number of balls held) that can change according to the progress of the game;
Non-specific control means (game control means 100) different from the specific control means,
The specific control means has a specific storage unit (frame control RAM 184) that stores first data (ball count master data) representing the predetermined item,
The non-specific control means has a non-specific storage unit (game RAM 104) that stores second data (game control side ball possession BU data) representing the predetermined item,
When a predetermined condition is established (the number of balls held is updated), the specific control means transmits third data (balls held update designation command) including the predetermined item represented by the first data to the non-specific control means. send and
The non-specific control means, upon receiving the third data, updates the second data stored in the non-specific storage unit based on the third data.

8-3-2. Invention C2
The game machine according to invention C2 is
A gaming machine according to invention C1,
The specific control means may newly generate the first data based on the second data and store it in the specific storage unit when it is determined that the specific storage unit is abnormal. Characteristic game machine.

8-3-3. Invention C3
The game machine according to invention C3 is
A gaming machine according to the invention C2,
A gaming machine, wherein the specific control means may determine whether or not the specific storage unit is abnormal when power is supplied to the gaming machine.

8-3-4. Invention C4
The game machine according to invention C4 is
A gaming machine according to any one of inventions C1 to C3,
A game machine, wherein the predetermined item is the number of game media (number of balls held) that can be used in a game.

8-3-5. Invention C5 is
A gaming machine according to any one of inventions C1 to C4,
The specific control means can update the first data stored in the specific storage unit according to progress of the game,
A gaming machine, wherein the predetermined condition includes that the specific control means updates the first data.

8-4-1. Invention D1
The gaming machine according to invention D1 is
specific control means (frame control board 180) for controlling the number of game media (number of balls held) that a player can use in a game;
Display means (image display device 50),
The specific control means has a specific storage section (frame control RAM 184) for storing data indicating the number of game media usable by a player in a game, and determines whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the specific storage section. may be
The gaming machine, wherein the display means is capable of displaying the number of game media that can be used by the player in a game when the specific control means determines that the specific storage unit has become abnormal.

8-4-2. Invention D2
The gaming machine according to invention D2 is
A gaming machine according to invention D1,
It further comprises an operable operation means (first effect button 40k),
The gaming machine, wherein the display means is capable of displaying the number of game media that the player can use in a game on condition that the operation means is operated in a predetermined manner (long-pressing operation).

8-4-3. Invention D3
The gaming machine according to invention D3 is
A gaming machine according to invention D2,
A gaming machine, wherein the predetermined operation can be performed during a predetermined period in which a game is not executed.

8-4-4. Invention D4
The gaming machine according to invention D4 is
A gaming machine according to any one of inventions D1 to D3,
Non-specific control means (game control means 100) different from the specific control means,
The non-specific control means has a non-specific storage unit (game RAM 104) that can execute control related to games and stores data indicating the number of game media that can be used by the player in the game,
The display means can execute a display effect according to the game by the non-specific control means,
When a predetermined condition is established (the number of balls held is updated), the specific control means provides a specific number including the number of game media that the player can use in the game represented by the data stored in the specific storage unit. Send data (ball number update designation command) to the non-specific control means,
When the non-specific control means receives the specific data, the non-specific control means updates the number of game media that can be used by the player in the game based on the specific data, based on the specific data, and
The display means is capable of displaying the number of game media usable by the player based on the data stored in the non-specific storage unit. A gaming machine characterized by:

8-5-1. Invention E1
The gaming machine according to invention E1 is
specific control means (frame control board 180) for controlling the number of game media (number of balls held) that a player can use in a game;
Display means (ball number display device 300),
The specific control means has a specific storage unit (frame control RAM 184) that stores first number data (ball number master data) representing the number of game media that a player can use in a game,
The display means includes a non-specific storage unit (display device side ball number BU unit 301d) that stores second number data (display device side ball number BU data) representing the number of game media that a player can use in a game. ), and capable of displaying the number of game media usable in a game by a player indicated by the second number data stored in the non-specific storage unit.

8-5-2. Invention E2
The game machine according to invention E2 is
A gaming machine according to invention E1,
When a predetermined condition is satisfied (the number of balls held is updated), the specific control means controls specific data (the number of balls held) including the number of game media that the player can use in the game represented by the first number data. an update designation signal) to the display means;
The gaming machine, wherein the display means, when receiving the specific data, updates the second number data stored in the non-specific storage unit based on the specific data.

8-5-3. Invention E3
The gaming machine according to invention E3 is
A gaming machine according to invention E2,
The specific control means can update the first number data stored in the specific storage unit according to progress of the game,
A gaming machine, wherein the predetermined condition includes that the specific control means updates the first number data.

8-6-1. Invention F1
The gaming machine according to invention F1 is
A gaming machine in which a game is played by causing stainless steel game balls to flow down to a game area (game area 6),
A specific detection sensor (illegal ball detection sensor 313a) that detects a steel game ball that sticks to a magnet but does not detect a stainless steel game ball,
A control means (frame control board 180),
When the specific detection sensor detects a steel game ball that sticks to a magnet, it outputs a specific detection signal (illegal ball detection signal) indicating the detection to the control means,
The gaming machine, wherein the control means is capable of executing a specific notification (fraudulent notification) based on the input of the specific signal.

8-6-2. Invention F2
The game machine according to invention F2 is
A gaming machine according to invention F1,
It further comprises a non-specific detection sensor (ejection ball detection sensor 310a) that detects steel game balls that stick to magnets and stainless steel game balls,
When the non-specific detection sensor detects a steel game ball that sticks to a magnet or a stainless steel game ball, it outputs a non-specific detection signal (ejection ball detection signal) indicating the detection to the control means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the control means is capable of executing control regarding a predetermined matter (the number of difference balls) regarding the game balls based on the input of the non-specific signal.

8-6-3. Invention F3
The gaming machine according to invention F3 is
A gaming machine according to invention F2,
A gaming machine, wherein the specific detection sensor and the non-specific detection sensor are attached in close proximity to each other in the vicinity of a specific location through which a game ball can pass.

8-6-4. Invention F4
The gaming machine according to invention F4 is
A gaming machine according to invention F3,
A gaming machine, wherein the specific location is positioned in a passage (recovery passage) formed outside the game area through which game balls that have entered the game area are collected and pass through.

8-6-5. Invention F5
The gaming machine according to invention F5 is
A gaming machine according to any one of inventions F1 to F4,
A gaming machine, wherein the specific notification is notification indicating that a steel game ball sticking to a magnet has been detected.

8-7-1. Invention G1
The game machine according to invention G1 is
A gaming machine in which a game is played by causing stainless steel game balls to flow down to a game area (game area 6),
A detection sensor (ejection ball detection sensor 310a) that detects a steel game ball that sticks to a magnet and a stainless steel game ball,
A control means (frame control board 180),
When the detection sensor detects a steel game ball that sticks to a magnet or a stainless steel game ball, it outputs a detection signal (ejection ball detection signal) indicating the detection to the control means,
The gaming machine, wherein the control means, when the detection signal is input, measures the time during which the detection signal is input.

8-7-2. Invention G2
The game machine according to invention G2 is
A gaming machine according to invention G1,
When the time during which the detection signal is input is longer than a predetermined value (unauthorized specified time), the control means performs specific notification (unauthorized notification) indicating that a steel game ball sticking to a magnet has been detected. A gaming machine characterized by:

8-7-3. Invention G3
The game machine according to invention G3 is
A gaming machine according to invention G1 or invention G2,
A game machine, wherein the detection sensor is installed in a passage (recovery passage) formed outside the game area through which game balls that have entered the game area are collected and pass through.

8-8-1. Invention H1
The game machine according to invention H1 is
A game machine in which a game area (game area 6) through which a shot game ball can flow down and a launch area (shoot area 7) through which the shot game ball can pass toward the game area are formed. hand,
A movable portion (entry blocking movable portion 76k) that can be switched between a standby state and an operating state is provided in the firing area,
The game machine, wherein the movable part allows a game ball moving toward the game area to pass through in the standby state, and does not allow a game ball moving toward the game area to pass through in the operating state.

8-8-2. Invention H2
The gaming machine according to invention H2 is
A gaming machine according to invention H1,
Further comprising a launching means (shooting device 7) for shooting game balls,
A gaming machine, wherein a recovery port is formed between the shooting means and the movable part for recovering game balls moving toward the shooting means from the game area side as foul balls.

8-8-3. Invention H3
The game machine according to invention H3 is
A gaming machine according to invention H1 or invention H2,
A frame-shaped inner frame (inner frame 22) and a game board 1 formed with the game area and fitted into an opening (opening 1A) formed in the inner frame,
The launching means is installed on the inner frame,
The firing area is formed over the inner frame and the game board,
A gaming machine, wherein the movable portion is a portion formed in the inner frame of the firing area and is arranged near a boundary between the inner frame and the game board.

8-8-4. Invention H4
The gaming machine according to invention H4 is
A gaming machine according to any one of inventions H1 to H3,
Further comprising a front door (front door 23) that is openably and closably supported by the inner frame on the front side of the game area and the firing area,
A gaming machine, wherein the movable portion may switch from the standby state to the operating state in response to opening of the front door.

8-9-1. Invention I1
The gaming machine according to invention I1 is
A front door (front door 23) supported to be openable and closable on the front side of the game area (game area 6) where shot game balls can flow down, and detection means (door A gaming machine comprising an open detection sensor 23a),
When the opening of the front door is not detected by the detecting means, the game ball is allowed to enter the game area, and when the opening of the front door is detected by the detecting means, the game ball is released. A gaming machine characterized in that there is a possibility of blocking entry into the gaming area.

8-9-2. Invention I2
The gaming machine according to invention I2 is
A gaming machine according to invention I1,
A shooting area (shooting area 7) through which the game ball can pass to head for the game area is formed on the downstream side of the game area with respect to the shooting of the game ball,
When the opening of the front door is not detected by the detection means, a game ball moving toward the game area in the shooting area is allowed to enter the game area, and the front door is detected by the detection means. A gaming machine characterized in that, in response to detection of the opening of the ball, entry of a game ball moving toward the game area in the launch area into the game area is prevented.

8-9-3. Invention I3
The gaming machine according to invention I3 is
A gaming machine according to invention I2,
In the shooting area, a movable part (entry prevention movable part 76k) is provided,
The movable portion is normally held in the standby state, and may switch from the standby state to the operating state in response to detection of opening of the front door by the detection means. .

8-10-1. Invention J1
The gaming machine according to invention J1 is
A game machine comprising a front door (front door 23) supported openable and closable on the front side of a game area (game area 6) in which shot game balls can flow down,
The front door is provided with a lock (lock 302) capable of holding the closure of the front door and releasing the closure,
A detection means (unlock detection sensor 302a) for detecting the release of the closure by the lock is provided,
When the release of the closure is not detected by the detection means, the shooting of the game ball is allowed, and when the release of the closure is detected by the detection means, the shooting of the game ball is prohibited. A gaming machine characterized by:

8-10-2. Invention J2
The gaming machine according to invention J2 is
A gaming machine according to invention J1,
Further comprising a shooting means (shooting device 72) for shooting game balls,
When the release of the closure is not detected by the detection means, the shooting means can shoot the game ball, and when the release of the closure is detected by the detection means, the shooting is performed. A game machine characterized in that the means cannot shoot the game ball.

8-11-1. Invention K1
The gaming machine according to invention K1 is
A board (upper frame lamp driver board 162) mounted with input/output ports (upper frame lamp input/output port 162a, lower frame lamp input/output port 163a, effect button input/output port 165a) having multiple terminals , lower frame lamp driver board 163, production button relay board 165),
an address associated with the input/output port is set by some of the plurality of terminals, and
A gaming machine, wherein the address includes specific unique information (manufacturer identification information) representing a predetermined attribute (manufacturer).

8-11-2. Invention K2
The gaming machine according to invention K2 is
A gaming machine according to invention K1,
A gaming machine, wherein the predetermined attribute is a company that manufactured the gaming machine.

8-11-3. Invention K3
The game machine according to invention K3 is
A gaming machine according to invention K2,
A gaming machine, wherein the predetermined attribute is a model related to the gaming machine.

8-11-4. Invention K4
The game machine according to invention K4 is
A gaming machine according to any one of inventions K1 to K3,
A game board (game board 1), a front door (front door 23) supported to be openable and closable with respect to the game board, and a control means (performance control board 120).
The substrate is installed on the front door,
The control means is installed on the game board,
Basic unique information representing the predetermined attribute is stored in the control means,
When the predetermined attribute represented by the basic unique information and the predetermined attribute represented by the specific unique information are different, the control means suggests that the game board and the front door are not matched. A game machine capable of executing specific notification (frame mismatch error notification).

8-11-5. Invention K5
The gaming machine according to invention K5 is
A gaming machine according to any one of inventions K1 to K4,
A gaming machine, wherein the address includes the specific unique information and individual information (device identification information) associated with each board.

PY, PY1, PY2 Pachinko machine 1 Game board 6 Game area 7 Launch area 11 First starting port 11a First starting port sensor 12 Second starting port 12a Second starting port sensor 14 Large Prize winning opening 14a Large prize winning opening sensor 22 Inner frame 23 Front door 23a Door open detection sensor 40 First effect button device 40k First effect button 40m Motor for effect button 50 Image display device 50a Display unit 52... Speaker 53... Frame lamp 53U... Upper frame lamp 53D... Upper frame lamp 72... Launcher 72a... Touch switch 72b... Launch volume knob 72k... Launch handle 72m... Launch motor 76... Entry blocking device 76k... Entry blocking movable part 100... Game control board 101... Game control microcomputer 104... Game RAM
106... Game control side ball number BU unit 120... Production control board 121... Production control microcomputer 128... Controller 129... RTC
140... Image control board 180... Frame control board 181... Frame control microcomputer 182... Frame control CPU
183 Frame control ROM
184 Frame control RAM
185... Ball number storage unit 186... Frame control side ball number BU unit 186a... First ball number BU unit 186b... Second ball number BU unit 186c... Third side number BU unit 162... Upper frame lamp Driver board 162a... Upper frame lamp input/output port 163... Lower frame lamp driver board 163a... Lower frame lamp input/output port 165... Production button relay board 165a... Production button input/output port 190... Power supply board 300... Unit display device 301 Ball number display device 301a Display button detection sensor 301b Ball number display 301d Display control side ball number BU unit 301k Ball number display button 302 Lock 302a Unlock detection sensor 310a Discharged ball detection sensor 311a Launched ball detection sensor 312a Foul ball detection sensor 313a Illicit ball detection sensor CU Card unit

Claims (1)

specific control means for controlling a specific number, which is the number of game media that a player can use in a game;
a display means;
The specific control means includes a specific storage unit that stores first number data representing the specific number,
The display means includes a non-specific storage unit that stores second number data representing the specific number,
The specific control means transmits first specific data including the specific number represented by the first number data to the display means when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
When receiving the first specific data, the display means updates the second number data stored in the non-specific storage unit based on the first specific data, and stores the second number data in the non-specific storage unit. A gaming machine capable of displaying the specific number indicated by the second number data,
The display means may transmit second specific data including the specific number represented by the second number data to the specific control means when it is determined that the specific storage unit is abnormal,
When it is determined that the specific storage unit is abnormal, the specific control means determines that the specific number represented by the second specific data transmitted from the display means satisfies a specific condition. While the first number data is newly generated based on the specific data and stored in the specific storage unit, if the specific number does not satisfy the specific condition, the first number data is based on the second specific data. causing the display means to execute specific notification corresponding to the abnormality without newly generating data and storing it in the specific storage unit;
The gaming machine, wherein the specific condition is that the specific number indicated by the second specific data is greater than zero.

Images